Manual Citroen C3-2004

HANDBOOK
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Access to the Handbook online
The Handbook is available on the CITROËN website,
in the "MyCitroën" section or at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ddb/
Select:
- the language,
- the vehicle, its body style,
- the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of 1st
registration of your vehicle.
Direct access to the Basic Guide.
This symbol indicates the latest

information available.

Welcome
Thank you for choosing Citroën C3. In this document, you will find all of the instructions and
recommendations on the use that will allow you to enjoy your vehicle to
This documents presents the information and recommendations the fullest. It is strongly recommended that you familiarise yourself with
required for you to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. it as well as the maintenance and warranty guide which will provide you
with information about warranties, servicing and roadside assistance
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in
associated with your vehicle.
this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification
for the country in which it was sold.
Key
The descriptions and illustrations are given as indications only. Safety warning
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical
characteristics, equipment and accessories without having to update Additional information
this edition of the guide.
Contributes to the protection of the environment
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Complete
Handbook is passed on to the new owner. Left-hand drive vehicle
Right-hand drive vehicle

Contents
Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Remote control 44 Lighting control stalk 77
Keyless Entry and Starting 46 Direction indicators (flashing) 79
Back-up procedures 49 Automatic illumination of headlamps 79
Doors 51 Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps 80
Eco-driving . Boot
Central locking
52
52
Automatic headlamp dipping
Headlight beam height adjustment
82
83
Eco-driving 6 Alarm 54 Wiper control stalk 84
Electric windows 55 Automatic wiping 86
Dashboard instruments
Ease of use and comfort
Instrument panels 8 Safety
Warning and indicator lamps 12 Rear seats 60
Steering wheel adjustment 61 Emergency warning lamps 88
Indicators 26
Mirrors 62 Horn 88
Distance recorders 32
Ventilation 63 Emergency or assistance 88
Equipment configuration for vehicles
Heating / Manual air conditioning 65 Electronic stability programme (ESC) 92
without screen 33
Automatic air conditioning 66 Seat belts 94
Monochrome screen C 33
Front demist – defrost 69 Airbags 97
Touch screen 35
Rear screen demist – defrost 69 Child seats 100
Trip computer 40
Courtesy lamp 70 Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 102
Date and time adjustment 42
Panoramic glass sunroof 70 ISOFIX child seats 109
Boot lighting 71 i-Size child seats 113
Interior fittings 71 Child lock 116
Boot fittings 74
Rear shelf (corporate version) 75
2
Contents .
Driving Practical information Technical data
Driving recommendations 118 Fuel tank 158 General points 201
Starting / Switching off the engine Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 159 Dimensions 204
with the key 120 Compatibility of fuels 160 Identification markings 205
Starting / Switching off the engine Snow chains 161
with Keyless Entry and Starting 122 Towing a trailer 162
Parking brake 125 Energy economy mode 163
5-speed manual gearbox 125 Changing a wiper blade 164
.
Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 126 Roof bars 164
Gear shift indicator 129 Bonnet 165 Audio and telematics
Hill start assist 130 Engines 167 CITROËN Connect Nav
Stop & Start 131 Checking levels 168 CITROËN Connect Radio
Recognition of speed limit and Checks 170
advice signs 133 Audio system Bluetooth
AdBlue ® (BlueHDi engines) 172
Speed limiter 137
Protections AIRBUMP ® 175
Cruise control 139
Collision Risk Alert and
Active Safety Brake 142
.
Fatigue detection system 145
Lane Departure Warning System 147 Alphabetical index
Blind Spot Monitoring System 148 In the event of a breakdown
Parking sensors 150 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 176
Reversing camera 152 Temporary puncture repair kit 177
Tyre under-inflation detection 153 Spare wheel 179
CITROËN ConnectedCAM™ 155 Changing a bulb 184
Changing a fuse 189
12 V battery 195
Towing 199
3
Overview
Driver's seat 1 7
Door mirrors 5-speed manual gearbox
Blind Spot Monitoring System Automatic gearbox
Electric windows Gear shift indicator
Hill start assist
2 Stop & Start
Opening the bonnet
8
3 Parking brake
Dashboard fuses
4
Courtesy lamp
Rear view mirror
Emergency or assistance call
CITROËN ConnectedCAM™
5
Touch screen
Monochrome screen C
Adjusting the date/time
6
Ventilation
Heating
Manual air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning
Front demisting / defrosting
Rear screen demisting / defrosting
4
Overview .
Instruments and controls (continued) 3
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Speed limit recognition
4
Instrument panels
Warnings and indicators
Indicators
Recorder, total distance
5
Steering wheel adjustment
Audible warning to alert
other road users to an imminent danger
6
Wiper control stalk
Trip computer
7
Central locking
Hazard warning lamps
8
1 Starting – Switching off the engine
Lighting control stalk
Direction indicators
2
Headlamp adjustment
5
Eco-driving
Drive smoothly Switch off the demisting and defrosting

Eco-driving controls, if not automatic.
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, Switch off the heated seat as soon as
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices
use engine braking rather than the possible.
that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel
brake pedal, and press the accelerator
consumption and CO2 emissions.
progressively. These practices contribute
towards a reduction in fuel consumption and Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
CO2 emissions and also help to reduce the when the ambient light level does not require
their use.
Optimise the use of your background traffic noise.
gearbox Avoid running the engine before moving off,
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h)
much faster while driving.
change up without waiting. While accelerating when the traffic is flowing well.
changing up early.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your
multimedia devices (film, music, video game
Control the use of your electrical etc.), you will contribute towards limiting the
With an automatic gearbox, give preference consumption of electrical energy, and so of
equipment
to automatic mode and avoid pressing the fuel.
accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly. Before moving off, if the passenger Disconnect your portable devices before
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by leaving the vehicle.
opening the windows and air vents before
The gear efficiency indicator invites you to using the air conditioning.
engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
indication is displayed in the instrument panel, and leave the air vents open.
follow it straight away. Consider using equipment that can help
For vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox, keep the temperature in the passenger
this indicator appears only in manual mode. compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds, etc.).
Unless it has automatic regulation, switch off
the air conditioning as soon as the desired
temperature has been reached.
6
Eco-driving .
Limit the causes of excess Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on
consumption any trailer or caravan.
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place

the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, Have your vehicle serviced regularly
as close as possible to the rear seats. (engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and compartment filter, etc.) and observe the
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, schedule of operations recommended in the
bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably use a manufacturer's service schedule.
roof box.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. With a BlueHDi diesel engine, if the SCR
system is faulty, your vehicle becomes
polluting. Visit as soon as possible a
CITROËN or a qualified workshop to
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
make your vehicle’s level of nitrogen oxide
refit your summer tyres.
emissions compliant to the standard.
When filling the tank, do not continue after the

3rd cut-off of the nozzle to avoid overflow.
Observe the recommendations

on maintenance
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, after the first 1,800 miles (3,000 kilometres)
referring to the label in the door aperture, that you will see the fuel consumption settle
driver's side. down to a consistent average.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
7
Instruments
LCD Picto instrument panel
Dials Control buttons

1. Speedometer (mph or km/h). A. General lighting dimmer.
2. Display screen. Depending on version: movements in a
3. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm). menu, a list; changing a value.
B. Reminder of servicing information or the
remaining range with the SCR system and
the AdBlue ®.
Resetting of the selected function
(maintenance indicator or trip distance
recorder).
Depending on version: entry in the
configuration menu (long press), validation
of a choice (short press).
8
Instruments
Display screen 9. Trip computer.

10. Total distance recorder (miles or km).
1
1. External temperature.
2. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge.
3. Speed limiter or cruise control settings.
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
5. Gear shift and/or selector position
indicator, shift and Sport and Snow modes
with an automatic gearbox.
6. Fuel level.
7. Oil level indicator (appears a few
seconds after switching on ignition, then
disappears).
8. Service indicator or range associated with
the AdBlue ® and the SCR system (miles
or km) then, trip distance recorder (miles
or km).
9
Instruments
LCD text instrument panel Dials
1. Speedometer (mph or km/h).

2. Fuel level indicator.
3. Display screen.
4. Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge.
5. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm).
Control buttons
A. Resetting the service indicator
Reminder of servicing information or the
remaining range with the SCR system and
the AdBlue ®.
Depending on version: go back up a level,
cancel the current operation.
B. General lighting dimmer.
Depending on version: movements in a
menu, a list; changing a value.
C. Resetting the trip distance recorder.
Depending on version: entry in the
configuration menu (long press), validation
of a choice (short press).
10
Instruments
Display screen If your vehicle does not have an audio system

or a touch screen, you can also configure some
equipment by using this display.
For more information on Configuring
1
equipment for vehicles without a screen,
refer to the associated section.
1. External temperature.
2. Speed limiter or cruise control settings.
Speed suggested by the speed limit
recognition system.
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
4. Gear shift and/or selector position
indicator, shift and Sport and Snow modes
with an automatic gearbox.
5. Trip computer and time counter of the
Stop & Start.
6. Display screen: trip distance recorder
(miles or km), service indicator or range
associated with the AdBlue ® and the
SCR system (miles or km), total distance
recorder, alert messages or functional
status.
11
Instruments
Warning and indicator Warning lights Operation indicator lights

lamps When the engine is running or the vehicle is The lighting of one of the following warning
being driven, illumination of one of the warning lights confirms that the corresponding system
Visual identifiers informing the driver that
lights indicates a fault which requires action on is on.
a system is in operation, switched off (on/
the part of the driver.
off indicator lights) or has developed a fault
Any fault resulting in the illumination of a
(warning lamp).
warning lamp must be investigated further
using the associated message.
When the ignition is switched on If you encounter any problems, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Certain warning lights come on for a few
seconds when the vehicle's ignition is switched
on.
When the engine is started, these same
warning lights should go off.
If they remain on, before driving refer to the
information on the warning lamp concerned.
Deactivation indicator lamp
If this indicator lamp comes on, this confirms
that the corresponding system has been
Associated warnings switched off intentionally.
This may be accompanied by an audible signal
Certain warning lights may come on in one of and a message being displayed.
two modes: fixed (continuous) or flashing.
Only by relating the type of lighting to the
operating status of the vehicle can it be
ascertained whether the situation is normal or
whether a fault has occurred.
In the event of a fault, the illumination of the
warning light may be accompanied by an
audible signal and/or a message.
12
Instruments
Warning / indicator lamp
STOP
State
Fixed, associated
Cause
Illumination of this warning lamp is

Action / Observations
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

1
with another warning related to a serious fault detected Park, switch off the ignition and call a CITROËN
lamp, accompanied with the engine, the braking system, dealer or a qualified workshop .
by an audible signal the power steering, etc., or a major
and a message. electrical fault.
Parking brake Fixed. The parking brake is applied or not Release the parking brake to extinguish the warning
properly released. lamp; keep your foot on the brake pedal.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the Parking brake, refer to
the corresponding section.
Brakes Fixed. The brake fluid level has dropped Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
significantly. Top up with brake fluid listed by CITROËN.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
Fixed, associated The electronic brake force Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning distribution (EBFD) system has a Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
+ lamp. fault. workshop.
Assisted Fixed. Major failure in the power steering. Drive carefully at reduced speed.
steering* Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
* Only on the LCD Picto instrument panel.
13
Instruments
Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations
Door(s) open Fixed and associated Speed below 6 mph (10 km/h), a Close the door or boot.
with a message door or the boot is not properly
identifying the door. closed.
Fixed, associated with Speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), a

a message identifying door or the boot is not properly
the door, together with closed.
an audible signal.
Belt(s) not Fixed or flashing A belt has not been buckled or has Pull the strap then insert the tongue into the buckle.
buckled / accompanied by an been unbuckled.
unbuckled** audible signal.
Front left belt The front left passenger belt has

not buckled/ not been buckled or has been
unbuckled* unbuckled.
Front right belt The front right passenger belt has

not buckled/ not been buckled or has been
unbuckled unbuckled.
Battery charge Fixed. The battery charging circuit has a The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack started.
or cut alternator belt, etc.). If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.

** Only on the LCD Text instrument panel.
14
Instruments
Engine oil
State
Fixed.
Cause
You must stop as soon it is safe to

You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.

1
pressure do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop .
Maximum Fixed. The temperature of the cooling You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
coolant system is too high. Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
temperature up to the required level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Engine self- Fixed. The emission control system has a The warning light should go off when the engine is started.
diagnosis fault. If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
system workshop without delay.
Flashing. The engine management system has There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be destroyed.
a fault. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Fixed, associated A minor failure in the engine has Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
with the service been detected. workshop.
warning lamp.
+
Fixed, associated A major failure in the engine has You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
with the STOP been detected. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN
warning lamp. dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
15
Instruments
Collision Risk Flashing. The system is operating. The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed
Alert / Active of collision with the vehicle ahead.
Safety Brake
Fixed, accompanied The system has a fault. Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
by a message and an qualified workshop.
audible signal.
Collision Risk Fixed, accompanied The system has been deactivated, For more information on the Collision Risk
Alert / Active by a message. via the vehicle configuration menu. Alert / Active Safety Brake system, refer to the
Safety Brake corresponding section.
Anti-lock Fixed. The anti-lock braking system has a The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Braking System fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
(ABS) CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay.
Under-inflation Fixed, accompanied One or more wheels has insufficient Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
by an audible signal pressure. This check should preferably be carried out when the
and a message. tyres are cold.
You must reinitialise the system after adjusting one or
more tyre pressures and after changing one or more
wheels.
For more information on Tyre under-inflation
detection, refer to the corresponding section.
Flashing then fixed, The system is faulty: tyre pressures Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
accompanied by are no longer monitored. Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
+ the Service warning qualified workshop.
lamp.
16
Instruments
Dynamic
State
Flashing.
Cause
The DSC/ASR regulation is

The system optimises traction and improves the

1
stability control operating. directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss
(DSC/ASR) of grip or trajectory.
Fixed. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Airbags Temporarily on. This warning light comes on for a This warning light should go off when the engine is started.
few seconds when you turn on the If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
ignition, then goes off. workshop.
Fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
pyrotechnic pretensioner systems workshop.
has a fault.
Passenger's Fixed. The control switch, located at the Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the
airbag system right side of the dashboard, is at the passenger front airbag.
"OFF" position. In this case, do not install a rearward facing child seat
The control switch, located in on the front passenger seat.
the glove box, is set to the "OFF"
position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
You can install a rearward facing
child seat, unless there is a fault with
the airbags (airbag warning lamp on).
17
Instruments
Particle filter Fixed, accompanied This indicates that the particle filter Traffic conditions permitting, regenerate the filter by
(diesel) by an audible signal is beginning to saturate. driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until
and a message about the warning lamp goes off.
the risk of particle For more information on Checks and particularly
filter blockage. those related to particle filters, refer to the
corresponding section.
Fixed, accompanied This indicates that the level in the Quickly arrange for a top-up by a CITROËN dealer or
by an audible signal additive tank is low. by a qualified workshop.
and a message about For more information on Checking the levels and
the particle filter’s particularly on the level of additive, refer to the
additive level being corresponding section.
too low.
Min fuel level Fixed, accompanied When it first comes on, around You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running
by an audible signal 5 litres of fuel remain in the tank. out of fuel.
and a message. You are now starting to use the fuel Until sufficient fuel has been added, this warning
reserve. lamp reappears every time the ignition is switched on,
accompanied by an audible warning and a message.
This audible warning and message are repeated with
increasing frequency as the fuel level drops towards
"0".
Tank capacity:
- Petrol: 45 litres approximately.
- Diesel: approximately 42 or 50 litres (depending
on version).
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as
this could damage the emission control and injection
systems.
18
Instruments
Water present in
State
Fixed.
Cause
The diesel filter contains water.

Risk of damaging the fuel injection system on diesel

1
the diesel fuel* engines.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
as soon as possible.
Lane departure Flashing (orange), A lane is being crossed, right side. Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction to
alert** accompanied by an A lane is being crossed, left side. return to the correct trajectory.
audible signal. For more information, refer to the corresponding
section.
Fixed. The lane departure warning system Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
is faulty. qualified workshop.

** Only on the LCD text instrument panel.
19
Instruments
AdBlue ® Fixed, on switching on The remaining driving range is As soon as possible, top up the AdBlue ®.
(BlueHDi Diesel) the ignition, accompanied between 350 miles (600 km) and You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its tank.
by an audible signal and 1,500 miles (2,400 km).
a message indicating the
remaining driving range.
Flashing, The remaining driving range is You must refuel AdBlue ® to avoid running out.
accompanied by an between 0 and 350 miles (0 and You can add up to 10 litres of AdBlue ® to its tank.
audible signal and a 600 km).
message indicating
the remaining driving
range.
Flashing, The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the To be able to start the engine, you must top up the
accompanied by an starting inhibition system required AdBlue ®.
audible signal and a by legislation prevents starting of the It is essential to add at least 4 litres of AdBlue ® to its
message indicating engine. tank.
that starting is
prevented.
20
Instruments
SCR emissions
State
Fixed, on switching on the

Cause
A fault with the SCR emissions

This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions

1
control system ignition, associated with control system has been detected. return to normal levels.
+ (BlueHDi Diesel) the service and engine
diagnostic warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
+ signal and a message.
Flashing, on switching on After confirmation of the fault with Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
the ignition, associated the emissions control system, without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
with the service and engine you can drive for up to 650 miles
diagnostic warning lamps, (1,100 km) before the engine starting
accompanied by an audible inhibition system is triggered.
signal and a message
indicating the remaining
driving range.
Flashing, on switching You have exceeded the authorised To be able to restart the engine, you must call on a
on the ignition, driving limit following confirmation CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
associated with the of a fault with the emissions control
service and engine system: the engine starting inhibition
diagnostic warning system prevents starting of the
lamps, accompanied engine.
by an audible signal
and a message.
For topping up or for more information on the AdBlue ® and the SCR system, refer to the corresponding section.
21
Instruments
Service Temporarily on, with a One or more minor faults for which Identify the cause of the fault using the message
message displayed. there is no specific warning lamp displayed in the instrument panel.
have been detected. You can deal with some problems yourself, such as a
door open or the start of saturation of the particle filter
(as soon as the traffic conditions allow, regenerate
the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph
(60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off).
For any other problems, such as a fault with the tyre
under inflation detection system, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Fixed, accompanied One or more major faults have Identify the cause of the fault using the message
by the display of a been detected for which there is no displayed in the instrument panel; you must then
message. specific warning lamp. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Fixed, associated The servicing interval has been Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
with the flashing and exceeded. Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
then fixed display of
the service spanner.
22
Instruments
Diesel engine
State
Fixed.
Cause
When the ignition is switched on

The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is

1
pre-heating with a key in the ignition switch or a determined by the ambient conditions (up to about
starting instruction made using the thirty seconds in severe winter conditions).
"START/STOP" button, the engine With an ignition switch and key, wait until the indicator
temperature makes engine pre- lamp goes off before starting.
heating necessary. With Keyless Entry and Starting, once it goes off,
starting is immediate, on the condition that the brake
pedal remains pressed with an automatic gearbox.
With Keyless Entry and Starting, once it goes off,
starting is immediate, on the condition that the clutch
pedal remains pressed with a manual gearbox.
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the indicator lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Rear foglamp Fixed. The rear foglamp has been switched Turn the ring on the lighting control lever to the rear to
on using the ring on the lighting switch off the rear foglamp.
control lever.
Blind spot Fixed. The function has been activated. For more information on Blind spot monitoring,
monitoring refer to the corresponding section.
system*
* Only on the LCD text instrument panel.

23
Instruments
Stop & Start Fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
jams, etc.), the Stop & Start system puts the automatically in START mode, as soon as you want
engine into STOP mode. to move off.
Flashes for a few STOP mode is temporarily For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the
seconds, then goes unavailable. corresponding section.
off. or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
Left-hand Flashing with audible The lighting control stalk has been
directional signal. moved down.
indicator lights
Right-hand Flashing with audible The lighting control stalk has been
direction indicator signal. moved up.
Sidelamps Fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

"Sidelamps" position.
Front foglamps Fixed. The front foglamps are switched on Turn the ring on the lighting control stalk twice
using the ring on the lighting control backwards to switch off the foglamps.
stalk.
24
Instruments
Automatic
State
Fixed.
Cause
The function has been activated via

The camera, placed on the top of the windscreen,

1
headlamp the Vehicle / Driving menu of the manages the main beam headlamps or dipped
+ dipping touch screen tablet. headlamps operation, according to the outside
The lighting stalk is in the "AUTO" lighting and the driving conditions.
position. For more information on the Automatic headlamp
or dipping, refer to the corresponding section.
Dipped beam Fixed. The lighting lever is in the "Dipped

headlights beam headlamps" position.
Main beam Fixed. The lighting lever has been pulled Pull the lever to return to dipped beam headlamps.
headlights towards you.
Foot on brake Fixed. Insufficient pressure on brake pedal. With an automatic gearbox, with the engine running,
press the brake pedal before releasing the parking
brake to unlock the lever and come out of position P.
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning light will
remain on.
Foot on the Fixed. In STOP mode of the Stop & Start, It must be pressed down completely to allow the
clutch pedal* the transition to START mode has engine to transition to START mode.
been rejected because the clutch
pedal is not fully pressed down.
* Only with the LCD Picto instrument panel.

25
Instruments
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Indicators Wait a few minutes before switching off the
Coolant temperature gauge engine.
After first switching off the ignition, open

the bonnet cautiously and check the
coolant level.
For more information on Checking levels,

refer to the corresponding section.
With the engine running:

- in zone A, the temperature is correct,
- in zone B, the temperature is too high; this
warning lamp and the central STOP warning
lamp come on, accompanied by the display
of a message and an audible signal.
26
Instruments
Service indicator
Warning and indicator State Cause Actions / Observations

1
Service spanner Fixed, temporary There are between 600 miles The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds
when the ignition is (1,000 km) and 1,800 miles on the instrument panel. Depending on version:
switched on. (3,000 km) before the next service - the distance recorder display line indicates the
is due. distance remaining (in kilometres or miles) before
the next service is due.
- an alert indicates the distance remaining (in
kilometres or miles) as well as the period before
the next service is due.
The service spanner goes off after a few seconds.
The alert may be triggered close to the due date.
Fixed, when the Less than 600 miles (1,000 km) The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds
ignition is switched remain before the next service is on the instrument panel. Depending on version:
on. due. - the distance recorder display line indicates the
distance remaining before the next service is due.
- an alert message indicates the distance remaining
as well as the period before the next service is
due.
The service spanner is on to indicate that service is
required very soon.
The alert may be triggered close to the due date.
27
Instruments
Warning and indicator State Cause Actions / Observations
Service spanner Flashing then fixed, The servicing interval has been The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds
when the ignition is exceeded. on the instrument panel. Depending on version:
switched on. - the total distance recorder display line indicates
the distance travelled since the due date was
reached. Value preceded by the "-" sign.
- an alert message indicates that the due date has
passed.
The service spanner remains on until the service has
been performed.
The alert is triggered when the due date has passed.
Flashing then fixed, Service date passed for Diesel The service indicator is displayed for a few seconds
when the ignition BlueHDi versions. on the instrument panel. Depending on version:
is switched on, - the total distance recorder display line indicates
+
associated with the the distance travelled since the due date was
service warning lamp. reached. Value preceded by the "-" sign.
- an alert message indicates that the due date has
passed.
The service spanner remains on until the service has
been performed.
The alert is triggered when the due date has passed.
The distance indicated (in kilometres

or miles) is calculated according to the
mileage covered and the time elapsed
since the last service.
28
Instruments
Resetting the service indicator
The service indicator must be reset after each

Retrieving the service
information
You can access the service information at any
Oil level insufficient
This is indicated, depending on the instrument
panel, by the display "OIL" oror by the message
1
service. time. "Oil level incorrect", accompanied by the
If you have carried out the service on your service warning lamp and an audible signal.
F Press this button. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using
vehicle yourself, switch off the ignition:
The service information is displayed for a few the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
seconds, then disappears. avoid damage to the engine.
For more information on Checking levels,
Engine oil level indicator
(depending on version)
Oil level indicator fault
On versions fitted with an electric oil level
This is indicated, depending on the instrument
F Press and hold this button. indicator, the state of the engine oil level is
panel, by the display "OIL_ _" oror by the
F Switch on the ignition; the distance recorder displayed in the instrument panel for a few
message "Oil level measurement invalid",
display begins a countdown, seconds, after the servicing information.
accompanied by the service warning lamp and
F When the display indicates =0, release the an audible signal.
button; the spanner disappears.
The level read will only be correct if the In the event of a fault with the electric
vehicle is on level ground and the engine indicator, the oil level is no longer
has been off for more than 30 minutes. monitored.
If you have to disconnect the battery
If the system is faulty, you must check the
following this operation, lock the vehicle
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
and wait at least five minutes for the reset
located under the bonnet.
to be registered.
Oil level correct For more information on Checking levels,
This is indicated, depending on instrument
panel, by the display "OIL OK" or by the
message "Oil level correct".
29
Instruments
AdBlue® range indicators Pressing this button temporarily

For more information on AdBlue ® and the
displays the driving range with the
SCR system, and in particular on ttopping
message "AdBlue: Range greater
up the AdBlue ®, refer to the corresponding
These range indicators are present only on than 1,500 miles (2,400 km)"
section.
BlueHDi Diesel versions. followed, if the tank level of AdBlue
Once the AdBlue ® tank is on reserve or after permits, with a message indicating
detection of a fault with the SCR emissions that you can add at least 10 litres. Range less than 350 miles
control system, when the ignition is switched
on, an indicator displays an estimate of the
distance that can be covered, the range, before
engine starting is prevented.
Remaining range between 1,500 and
350 miles (2,400 and 600 km) When switching on the ignition, this warning light
flashes and the service warning lamp comes
In the event of the risk of non- on, accompanied by an audible signal and the
starting related to a lack of temporary display of "NO START IN" and a
AdBlue® distance on the instrument panel, indicating the
When switching on the ignition, the warning remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres
light comes on, accompanied by an audible before engine starting is prevented – (e.g.: "NO
The engine start prevention system signal and the display of "NO START IN" and START IN 200 miles (300 km)" means "Starting
required by regulations is activated a distance on the instrument panel, indicating will be prevented in 200 miles (300 km)".
automatically once the AdBlue ® tank is the remaining range expressed in miles or
empty. kilometres before engine starting is prevented When driving, this message is displayed every
– (e.g.: "NO START IN 900 miles (1,500 km)" 30 seconds until the AdBlue level has been
means "Starting will be prevented in 900 miles topped up.
Range greater than 1,500 miles (2,400 km) It is essential to top up as soon as possible and
(1,500 km").
When switching on the ignition, there is no before the tank is completely empty; otherwise
automatic display of range in the instrument it will not be possible to restart the engine after
panel. When driving, the message comes up every the next stop.
200 miles (300 km) until the tank is topped up.
The reserve level has been reached; it is
recommended that you top up as soon as For more information on the AdBlue ®
possible. (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on
It is recommended that you not top up by more topping up, refer to the corresponding
than 10 litres of AdBlue. section.
30
Instruments
Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue ® In the event of a fault with

the SCR emissions control
system
If it is a temporary fault, the alert
disappears during the next journey, after
self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
1
When switching on the ignition, the warning
lamp flashes and the SERVICE warning lamp
An engine immobiliser is activated During an authorised driving phase
lights up, accompanied by an audible signal
automatically after you have driven a (between 650 miles and 0 miles) (1,100 km and 0 km)
and the temporary display of "NO START IN"
further 650 miles (1,100 km) following
and 0 miles or kilometres on the instrument
confirmation of a fault with the SCR
panel – ("NO START IN 0 miles" (0 km) means
emissions control system. Have the
"Starting prevented").
system checked by a CITROËN dealer or
The AdBlue ® tank is empty: the starting a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed (after
inhibition system required by legislation
30 miles (50 km) covered with the permanent
prevents starting of the engine.
In the event of the detection of a fault display of the message signalling a fault), the
SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps
To be able to restart the engine, it is come on and the AdBlue warning lamp flashes,
essential to add at least 4 litres of AdBlue ® accompanied by an audible signal and the
to its tank. temporary display in the instrument cluster of
"NO START IN (600 km)" and a distance,
The AdBlue, SERVICE and self-diagnostic indicating the driving range expressed in miles or
For more information on the AdBlue ® (BlueHDi
warning lamps comes on, accompanied by an kilometres before engine starting is prevented –
engines), and in particular on topping up, refer
audible signal and the display of the message (e.g.: "NO START IN 350 miles" means "Starting
to the corresponding section.
"Emissions fault". will be prevented in 350 miles").
The alert is triggered when driving when the While driving, this display appears every
fault is detected for the first time, then when 30 seconds as long as the fault with the SCR
switching on the ignition for subsequent emissions control system persists.
journeys, while the fault persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the
ignition.
You should go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
Otherwise you will not be able to restart the
vehicle.
31
Instruments
Starting prevented Distance recorders Trip distance recorder

The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the
SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lights
come on and the AdBlue warning light flashes,
accompanied by the temporary display of "NO
When travelling abroad, you may have to
START IN" and 0 miles or kilometres – ("NO
change the units of distance: the display It measures the distance travelled since it was
START IN 0 miles" means "Starting prevented")
of road speed must be in the official units reset by the driver.
in the instrument cluster.
(miles or km) for the country. Resetting the trip recorder
The change of units is done via the screen F With the ignition on, press the button until
configuration menu, with the vehicle dashes appear.
You have exceeded the authorised driving
stationary.
limit: the starting prevention system
inhibits engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on Total distance recorder
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
It measures the total distance travelled by the

vehicle since its first registration.
32
Instruments
Equipment configuration
for vehicles without
- DRIVE ASSIST:
• TYRE PRESSURES (Reinitialisation of
the under-inflation detection system),
Monochrome screen C
Displays on the screen
1
screen • VIGILANCE ALT (Fatigue Detection
System),
If your vehicle does not have an audio system • ADVISED SPEED (Speed limit
or a touch screen, you can still configure some recognition),
equipment by using the LCD text instrument • COLLISION ALT (Collision risk alert),
panel display. • PARKING (Parking assistance).
For more information on one of these functions,
Control buttons refer to the corresponding section.
A long press of this button takes you

to the configuration menu, a short
This displays the following information:
press confirms.
- time,
- date,
Pressing one of these buttons lets - ambient temperature (this flashes if there is
you move in a menu, a list; change a risk of ice),
a value. - visual parking sensor information,
- the audio source being listened to,
- telephone or Bluetooth system information,
Pressing this button takes you back
- alert messages,
up a level or cancels the current
- settings menus for the screen and the
operation.
vehicle equipment.
Display screen menus

- LIGHTING:
• DAYTIME LAMPS,
• AUTO HEADLAMPS (Automatic
switching on of headlamps),
• GUIDE LAMPS (Guide-me-home
lighting),
• WELCOME LAMPS (Welcome lighting).
33
Instruments
Controls - "Telephone", For more information on the "Telephone"

- "Trip computer", application, see the "Audio and telematics"
- "Connections", section.
- "Personalisation-configuration",
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
menu required, then confirm by pressing the "Trip computer" menu
OK button.
"Multimedia" menu
From your audio system, you can press: This menu allows you to consult information
F the MENU button for access to the main concerning the status of the vehicle.
menu,
F the "5" or "6" buttons to scroll through the Warning log
items on the screen, With the audio system switched on, this
menu allows you to activate or deactivate the It summarises the alert messages of the
F the "7" or "8" buttons to change the value
functions associated with the use of the radio functions, displaying them on the screen.
of a setting,
F the OK button to confirm, (RDS, DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText
or (TXT) display) or to choose the media play
F the Back button to abandon the operation in mode (Normal, Random, Random all, Repeat). "Connections" menu
progress. For more information on the "Multimedia"
application, refer to the "Audio and telematics"
section.
With the audio system on, this menu allows

Main menu
"Telephone" menu a Bluetooth device (telephone, media player)
to be paired and the connection mode to be
defined (hands-free, playing audio files).
For more information on the "Connections"
application, see the "Audio and telematics"
With the audio system switched on, this menu section.
F Press the MENU button for access to the allows you to make a call or view the various
main menu: telephone directories.
- "Multimedia",
34
Instruments
"Personalisation-
configuration" menu
Display configuration
This menu allows you to change the language
used by the display from a defined list.
Touch screen
The touch screen gives access to:
- the heating/air conditioning controls,
1
This menu gives access to the following - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
settings: functions and systems,
- "Choice of units", - audio system and telephone controls and
This menu gives access to the following
- "Date and time adjustment", the display of associated information,
functions:
- "Display personalisation", and, depending on equipment, allows:
- "Define the vehicle parameters",
- "Choice of language", - the display of alert messages and the visual
- "Display configuration".
parking sensors information,
- the permanent display of the time and the
Define the vehicle parameters exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp
As a safety measure, the driver must only
carry out operations that require sustained appears when there is a risk of ice),
attention when stationary. - access to the internet services and
This menu allows the following equipment to
navigation system controls and the display
be activated/deactivated, depending on the
of associated information.
version and/or country of sale:
- Vehicle lighting
• "Daytime lights",
- Interior lighting
• "Follow-me-home headlamps", As a safety measure, the driver should
• "Welcome lighting". only carry out operations that require
- Comfort close attention with the vehicle
• Tyre inflation, stationary.
• Fatigue Detection System, Some functions are not accessible when
• Parking assistance. driving.
- Driving assistance
• "Speed recommendation",
• "Blind spot monitoring".
For more information on the different
equipment, refer to the corresponding sections.
35
Instruments
General operation Use this button to confirm. For more information on Heating, Manual
air conditioning and Automatic air
Recommendations conditioning, refer to the corresponding
Use this button to return to the sections.
Use is possible in all temperatures. previous page.
Do not use pointed objects on the touch Telephone.
screen. See the "Audio and telematics"
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch
Menus section.
screen. Applications.
Allows the display of the connected
services available.
See the ‘Audio and telematics’
section.
Principles
Vehicle or Driving.*
Use the buttons on each side of the touch
Allows the activation, deactivation and
screen to access the menus, then use the
adjustment of settings for certain functions.
buttons that appear on the touch screen.
Certain functions may be displayed over 1 or Radio Media.
2 pages. See the "Audio and telematics" The functions accessible from this menu are
To deactivate/activate a function, press OFF/ON. section. arranged under two tabs: "Vehicle settings"
To modify a setting (lighting duration, etc.) or and "Driving functions".
Mirror Screen or Connected
access additional information, press the symbol
navigation.* Volume control/mute.
for the function.
See the ‘Audio and telematics’ See the ‘Audio and telematics’
section. section.
Air conditioning.
Allows control of the settings for
temperature, air flow, etc.
After a few moments with no action on Press with three fingers on the touch
the secondary page, the primary page is screen to display the menu carousel.
displayed automatically.
* Depending on equipment.
36
Instruments
Upper bar
Certain information is always present in the
upper bar of the touch screen:
CITROËN Connect Nav:
Families Functions
1
- Recall of the air conditioning information, "Security" - "Wiping in reverse gear": Activation/deactivation of the rear
and access to a simplified menu wiper when in reverse gear if the front wiper is on.
(temperature and air flow adjustment only). - "Active Safety Brake": activation / deactivation of the Active
- Summary of information from the Radio Safety Brake.
Media, Telephone menus and navigation - "Fatigue Detection System": activation / deactivation of the
instructions *. driver fatigue detection system.
- Notifications zone (texts and email)*. - "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of
speed limit recognition.
- Access to Configuration.
"Driving lighting" - "Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps )
depending on country of sale.
- "Directional headlamps": activation / deactivation of
cornering lighting.
"Vehicle" menu / "Driving"
menu
"Comfort lighting" - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation / deactivation of
Tab "Vehicle settings" automatic guide-me-home lighting.
The functions are grouped into 3 families. - "Welcome lighting": activation / deactivation of exterior
welcome lighting.
- "Mood lighting": activation / deactivation of ambient lighting
and adjustment of brightness.
* Depending on equipment
37
Instruments
CITROËN Connect Radio: Tab "Driving functions"
Families Functions Function Comment
Headlights - "Guide-me-home lighting": activation/deactivation of "Stop & Start" Activation/

automatic guide-me-home lighting. Deactivation of the
- "Welcome lighting": activation/deactivation of exterior function.
welcome lighting.
- "Daytime running lamps" (LED daytime running lamps ) "Parking sensors" Activation/
depending on country of sale. Deactivation of the
function.
Comfort - "Rear wiper in reverse": activation / deactivation of the rear "Traction control" Activation/
wiper on with reverse gear. Deactivation of the
function.
"Blind spot Activation/

Security - "Automatic emergency braking": activation / deactivation of sensors" Deactivation of the
automatic emergency braking. function.
- "Fatigue Detection System": activation / deactivation of the
driver fatigue detection system. "Under-inflation Reset of the tyre
- "Recommended speed display": activation/deactivation of detection reset" under-inflation
speed limit recognition. detection system.
"Diagnostic" Summary of current

alerts.
For more information on one of these
functions, refer to the corresponding
section. For more information on one of these
functions, refer to the corresponding
section.
38
Instruments
"Settings" menu
CITROËN Connect Nav
Touch screen settings
The functions available through the
upper menu bar are detailed in the
CITROËN Connect Radio
Button Comments
1
table below.
Button Comments Turn off the screen (black
These settings are also accessible
using the "OPTIONS" key on the screen).
Selection of a topic.
"Settings" menu. To return to the current screen,
press the black screen or the
MENU button.
Audio settings (sound Button Comments
ambience, distribution, level, Adjustment of the brightness of
voice volume, ringer volume). Choice of units: the instrument panel ambient
- temperature (°Celsius or lighting.
°Fahrenheit),
Choice and settings for three
Switch off the screen. - distances and fuel consumption
user profiles.
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Choice of language for the Touch screen settings.

Touch screen settings. touch screen display.
Setting the date and time. Activation and configuration of

Option of synchronisation with the settings for the Wi-Fi.
GPS.
Adjustment of the display

parameters (text scrolling,
animations, etc.) and
brightness.
Choice and settings for three

user profiles.
39
Instruments
Touch screen settings

Trip computer
The functions available through the
Information displayed about the current journey
upper menu bar are detailed in the
(range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).
table below.
These settings are also accessible
from the "OPTIONS" key on the
"Settings" menu. Data displays
They are displayed successively.
- Daily mileage. F Press the knob on the steering wheel.
Button Comments
- Range.
Adjustment of the display - Current fuel consumption.
parameters (text scrolling, - Average speed. Reset trip
animations, etc.) and - Time counter of the Stop & Start.
The reset will be performed when the trip is
brightness. - Information on the speed limit recognition
displayed.
system.
Choice of units:
- temperature (°Celsius or
°Fahrenheit),
- distances and fuel consumption
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l).
Choice of language for the F Press this button, located at the edge of
touch screen display. the wiper control stalk, for more than two
seconds.
F Press this button, located at the tip of the
Setting the date and time.
wiper control stalk.
40
Instruments
This value may fluctuate if a change

of driving style or terrain results in a
significant change in the current fuel
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip
1
consumption. computer reset.
Dashes are displayed when the range falls

below 20 miles (30 km).
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the Distance travelled
F Press the knob on the steering wheel for range is recalculated and is displayed if it
more than two seconds. exceeds 60 miles (100 km). (miles or km)
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
If dashes are displayed continuously while
driving in place of the digits, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. Time counter Stop & Start
(minutes / seconds or hours /
minutes)
Current fuel consumption
F Press this button for more than two (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
A time counter calculates the sum of the
seconds. Calculated over the last few periods in STOP mode during a journey.
seconds. It resets to zero every time the ignition is
A few definitions… switched on.
Range This function is only displayed from

(miles or km) 20 mph (30 km/h).
The distance which can still
be travelled with the fuel
remaining in the tank (at the
Average fuel consumption
average fuel consumption (mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
seen over the last few miles Calculated since the last trip
(kilometres) travelled). computer reset.
41
Instruments
Lighting dimmer Touch screen Date and time adjustment

Allows manual adjustment of the brightness Without audio system
of the instrument panel and touch screen
according to the outside lighting.
Only works when the vehicle lights are on
(except daytime running lamps) and in night
mode.
Two buttons
F In the Settings menu, select "Brightness".

F Adjust the brightness by pressing the
arrows or moving the cursor.
You can adjust the date and time in the

instrument panel display.
Lamps lit, press button A to increase the The brightness can be adjusted differently
for day mode (lighting control stalk in F Hold this button down.
brightness of the instruments and controls
and the ambience of the vehicle or button B to position "0") and night mode (lighting
reduce it. control stalk in any other position).
As soon as the lighting reaches the required F Press one of these buttons to
level of brightness, release the button. select the setting to be changed.
F Press this button briefly to

confirm.
F Press one of these buttons to

change the setting and confirm
again to register the change.
42
Instruments
With audio system With CITROËN Connect

Radio
F Select the Settings menu.
F Select "Setting the time-date".
1
F Select the "Date" or "Time" tab.
F Adjust the date and/or time using the
F Select "System configuration". numeric keypad.
F Select "Date and time". F Press this button to confirm.
F Press the MENU button for access to the

main menu. F Select "Date" or "Time".
F Press the "7" or "8" button to display the Additional adjustments
F Choose the display formats.
"Personalisation-configuration" menu, then F Change the date and/or time using the You can choose:
press OK. numeric keypad. - To change the display format of the date
F Press the "5" or "6" button to display the and time (12h/24h).
"Display configuration" menu, then F Press this button to confirm. - To change the time zone.
press OK. - To activate or deactivate synchronisation
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the with the GPS (UTC).
"Date and time adjustment" button, then
press OK. With CITROËN Connect Nav
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the
setting to modify. Confirm by pressing the The system does not automatically
OK button. Adjustment of the time and date is only manage the change between winter and
F Adjust the settings one by one, confirming available if synchronisation with GPS is summer time (depending on country).
with the OK button. deactivated. The change between winter and summer
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons, then the OK time is done by changing the time zone.
button to select the OK box and confirm or F Select the Settings menu.
press the Back button to cancel.
F Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

secondary page.
43
Access
Remote control Ejecting the key
General points
The key, integral with the remote control, can Version without Keyless Entry and Starting
be used for the following functions, depending F Press this button; the key is ejected from its
on version: housing.
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle, To avoid damaging the mechanism, first press
The remote control can be used for the - turning the child lock on or off, this button to fold it.
following functions, depending on version: - activation/deactivation of the passenger's
- unlocking/locking/deadlocking the vehicle, front airbag,
- opening of the fuel tank cap, - back-up door locking,
- remote switching on of the lighting, - switching on the ignition and starting /
- activation / deactivation of the alarm, stopping the engine.
- locating the vehicle,
- vehicle immobiliser.
Under normal conditions, it is recommended to Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be
use the remote control. locked or unlocked in the event of a failure of
the remote control, the central locking, the
battery, etc.
For more information on the Back-up
Version with K eyless Entry and Starting
procedures, refer to the associated section.
F Pull on this button to remove the key from
the housing.
To return it to the housing, first pull on this
button.
44
Access
Unlocking the vehicle If one of the doors or the boot is not fully Deadlocking renders the interior door
closed, the locking does not take place. controls inoperative.
F Press the open padlock to unlock
2
However, if your vehicle has an alarm, It also deactivates the interior central
the vehicle.
this will be totally activated after about locking button on the dashboard.
45 seconds. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
When the unlocking button is pressed, the If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently and vehicle when it is deadlocked.
flashing of the direction indicators for a few if no action is taken with the doors or with
seconds signals: the boot, the vehicle will automatically lock
- unlocking of the vehicle for versions without itself again after about 30 seconds. If the
an alarm, alarm had been previously activated, it will
- deactivation of the alarm for other versions. be reactivated automatically.
Locating your vehicle

This function allows you to identify your vehicle
Locking the vehicle Deadlocking from a distance, particularly in poor light.
Normal locking F Make a first press on this button.
F Within five seconds, press this F Press this button.
F Press this button.
button again to deadlock the
vehicle.
On the first press of the locking button, For versions without alarm, deadlocking is The sidelamps and the dipped headlamps
illumination of the direction indicators for a few confirmed by illumination of the direction come on for 30 seconds.
seconds indicates: indicators for a few seconds on the second Pressing the button again before the end of this
- locking of the vehicle for versions without press of the locking button. period switches the lamps off immediately.
alarm,
- activation of the alarm for other versions.
45
Access
eyless Entry and

K Unlocking the vehicle If one of the doors or the boot is still open
Starting or if the electronic key for the K eyless
Entry and Starting system has been left
inside the vehicle, the central locking does
not take place.
However, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully
activated after about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and there is then no action on the doors
or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock
itself again after about 30 seconds.
If fitted to your vehicle, the alarm will also
be reactivated automatically.
System that allows the unlocking, locking

and starting of the vehicle while keeping the
electronic key on your person.
F With the electronic key on your person and
As a safety measure (children on board),
in the recognition zone A, pass your hand
never leave the vehicle without taking the
The electronic key can also be used as a behind the door handle of one of the front
electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
remote control. doors to unlock the vehicle or press the
Starting system with you, even for a short
For more information on the Remote tailgate opening control.
period.
Control, refer to the corresponding Be aware of the risk of theft when the
section. electronic key for the Keyless Entry and
The flashing of the direction indicators for
a few seconds indicates: Starting system is in one of the defined
- the unlocking of the vehicle for zones with the vehicle unlocked.
versions without alarm,
- the deactivation of the alarm for other
versions.
46
Access
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the

In order to preserve the battery in the Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt,
keys is left inside the vehicle.
electronic key and the vehicle's battery, etc.) on the inner surface of the door
2
the "hands-free" functions are put into handle may affect detection.
long-term standby after 21 days without The lighting of the direction indicators for If cleaning the inner surface of the door
use. To restore these functions, press a few seconds indicates: handle using a cloth does not restore
one of the remote control buttons or start - the locking of the vehicle for versions detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
the engine with the electronic key in the without an alarm, qualified workshop.
reader. - the activation of the alarm for other A sudden splash of water (stream of water,
For more information on Starting with versions. high pressure jet washer, etc:) may be
Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the identified by the system as the desire to
corresponding section. open the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle

Normal locking
For safety and theft protection reasons,

do not leave your electronic key in the
vehicle, even when you are close to it.
It is recommended that you keep it with
F With the electronic key in the recognition you.
zone A, press with a finger or thumb on one
of the front door handles (at the markings)
to lock the vehicle.
47
Access
Deadlocking Lost keys, remote control, electronic key As a safety precaution (with children on
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's board), remove the key from the ignition or
Deadlocking renders the interior door registration certificate, your personal take the electronic key when you leave the
controls inoperative. identification documents and if possible, the vehicle, even for a short time.
It also deactivates the interior central label bearing the key code.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve Electrical interference
locking button on the dashboard.
the key code and the transponder code The K
eyless Entry and Starting electronic
Therefore, never leave anyone inside the
required to order a new key key may not operate if close to certain
vehicle when it is deadlocked.
electronic devices: telephone, laptop
Remote control computer, strong magnetic fields, etc.
The high frequency remote control is a
sensitive system; do not operate it while it is Anti-theft protection
in your pocket as there is a possibility that Do not make any modifications to the
it may unlock the vehicle, without you being electronic engine immobiliser system; this
aware of it. could cause malfunctions.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your For vehicles with an ignition switch, do
remote control out of range and out of sight not forget to remove the key and turn the
of your vehicle. It may become inoperative. It steering to engage the steering lock.
will then be necessary to reinitialise it again.
The remote control does not operate when
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
the key is in the ignition, even when the
Have the key codes memorised by a
ignition is switched off.
CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in
your possession are the only ones which can
Locking the vehicle
start the vehicle.
Driving with the doors locked may make
F With the electronic key in the recognition access to the passenger compartment by
zone A, press with a finger or thumb on one the emergency services more difficult in an
of the front door handles (at the markings) emergency.
to lock the vehicle.
F Within five seconds, press the front door
handle again to deadlock the vehicle. Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to
the environment.
Take them to an approved collection point.
48
Access
For versions without alarm, flashing of the Locking

Back-up procedures direction indicators for a few seconds confirms F Open the doors.
Total unlocking / locking of that the procedure has completed correctly. F For the rear doors, check that the child lock
2
is not on.
the vehicle with the key Refer to the corresponding section.
These procedures should be used in the If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
following cases: on opening the door; switch on the ignition
- remote control cell battery flat, to stop it.
- remote control fault,
- vehicle in an area subject to strong
electromagnetic interference.
If your vehicle is fitted with an alarm, this
In the first case, you can also replace the
function will not be activated when locking
remote control cell battery.
with the key.
Refer to the corresponding section.
In the second case, you can also reinitialise the
remote control.
Refer to the corresponding section. Without central locking
F Remove the black cap on the edge of the
These procedures should be used in the
door, using the key.
following cases:
F Without forcing, insert the key into the
- central locking fault,
aperture; then, without turning it, move the
- battery disconnected or discharged.
latch sideways towards the inside of the
door.
F Remove the key and refit the black cap.
Driver's door F Close the doors and check from the outside
F Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle that the vehicle is locked.
F Insert the key in the door lock. to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
F Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle
to unlock it, or towards the rear to lock it.
F Turn the key to the rear again within
Passenger doors
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. Unlocking a door
F Pull the interior opening control for the door.
49
Access
Changing the battery F Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver Version without K
eyless Entry
at the cutout. and Starting
A message is displayed on the instrument panel F Remove the cover.
screen when replacement of the battery is needed. F Remove the discharged battery from its
housing.
Version without K
eyless Entry and Starting F Fit the new battery into its housing
Battery type: CR1620 / 3 volts. observing the polarity.
F Clip the cover onto the casing.
The remote control must be reinitialised after
replacing the battery.
For more information on reinitialising the
remote control, refer to the corresponding
section.
F Switch off the ignition.
F Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition).
Reinitialising the remote F Press the closed padlock button for a few
control seconds.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key
Following replacement of the battery or in from the switch.
the event of a remote control fault, it may be The remote control is now fully operational
Version with K
eyless Entry and Starting necessary to reinitialise the remote control. again.
Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts.
Version with Keyless Entry and

Starting
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the

remote control) in the lock to unlock your
vehicle.
50
Access
Doors From inside
Opening
F Place the electronic key against the back-up

From outside
2
reader on the steering column and hold it
there until the ignition is switched on.
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear
lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch
pedal.
F With an automatic gearbox, select
position P, then firmly press the brake
pedal.
F Pull a door opening lever on the inside; this
unlocks the whole vehicle.
F After unlocking the vehicle or holding the
electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Starting system in the recognition zone, pull
the door handle. Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
- with the engine running or the
vehicle moving (speed below
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
F Switch on the ignition by pressing the lamp comes on, accompanied by
"START/STOP" button. an alert message displayed for a
The electronic key is now fully operational few seconds.
again. - with the vehicle moving (speed
above 6 mph (10 km/h)), in
If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact
addition to the warning lamp and
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
alert message, an audible signal
without delay.
sounds for a few seconds.
51
Access
Boot Back-up release Central locking

Opening To manually unlock the boot in the event of a This function allows the doors and boot to be
battery or central locking failure. locked or unlocked simultaneously from inside
the vehicle.
Unlocking Manual mode

F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
the lock from inside the boot.
Locking
F With the vehicle unlocked or with the

electronic key of the Keyless Entry and
Starting system in the recognition zone,
press the central tailgate control.
F Lift the lid.
F Press this button to lock the vehicle.

Closing The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
F Lower the tailgate using one of the interior
lock to unlock the tailgate.
grab handles.
F Move the latch to the left.
If the boot is not closed correctly: If one of the doors is open, the central
- when the engine is running, locking from the inside does not take
place.
this warning lamp comes on, Locking after closing
accompanied by the display of a
message for a few seconds, If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
- when the vehicle is moving will remain locked.
Release
(speed higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h)), this warning lamp F Press this button again to unlock the
comes on, accompanied by an vehicle.
audible signal and the display of The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.
a message for a few seconds.
52
Access
When locking / deadlocking from the Anti-intrusion security Activation / Deactivation

outside
This system allows automatic simultaneous
2
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
locking of the doors and boot as soon as the
from the outside, the red indicator lamp
speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
flashes and the button is inactive.
F After normal locking, pull one of the
interior door levers to unlock the
vehicle. Operation
F After deadlocking, it is necessary to
use the remote control, K eyless Entry If one of the doors or the boot is open, the
and Starting or the integral key to automatic central locking does not take place. You can activate or deactivate this function
unlock the vehicle. permanently.
F With the ignition on, press this button
This is signalled by the sound of until an audible signal is triggered and a
the locks rebounding, accompanied corresponding message of confirmation is
by illumination of this symbol in the displayed.
Automatic mode instrument panel, an audible signal The state of the system stays in memory when
and the display of an alert message. switching off the ignition.
This is the automatic central locking of the
vehicle when driving, also called anti-intrusion
Carrying long or voluminous objects
security.
If you want to drive with the boot open, you Driving with the doors locked may render
For more information on Anti-intrusion
should press the central locking button access for the emergency services
security, refer to the corresponding section.
to lock the doors. Otherwise, every time difficult in an emergency.
the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the locks will rebound and the
alerts mentioned above will appear.
Pressing the central locking button
unlocks the vehicle.
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this unlocking is
temporary.
53
Access
Alarm Locking the vehicle with When the vehicle automatically locks itself
(Depending on the country where the product alarm system again (as happens if a door or boot is not
is sold.) opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
System that protects and provides a deterrent
Activation the monitoring system is also reactivated.
against theft and break-ins. It provides the F Switch off the ignition and get out of the
following types of monitoring: vehicle.
F Lock the vehicle using the remote control or
- perimeter monitoring the Keyless Entry and Starting system. Triggering of the alarm
The system checks the vehicle (locked or The monitoring system is active. The locking
This is indicated by sounding of the siren
unlocked). button’s indicator lamp, located on the
and flashing of the direction indicators for
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a dashboard, flashes once per second and
30 seconds.
door, the boot, the bonnet, etc. the direction indicators come on for about
The monitoring functions remain active until
2 seconds.
the alarm has been triggered eleven times
Self-protection function consecutively.
The system checks the status of its Following an instruction to lock the When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
components. vehicle, the exterior perimeter monitoring control or the Keyless Entry and Starting
The alarm is triggered if the battery, central is activated after a delay of 5 seconds. system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
control unit or the siren wiring is out of service If an opening (door, boot, etc.) is not informs you that the alarm was triggered during
or damaged. fully closed, the vehicle is not locked but your absence. When the ignition is switched
the exterior perimeter monitoring will be on, this flashing stops immediately.
activated after a delay of 45 seconds.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop. Deactivation
Failure of the remote
control
F Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
and Starting system.
F unlock the vehicle using the key (integral to
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
the remote control) in the driver's door lock,
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
F open the door; the alarm is triggered,
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
F switch on the ignition; the alarm stops; the
button’s indicator lamp goes off.
54
Access
Locking the vehicle without Electric windows Automatic operation

activating the alarm (depending on version)
2
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
(integral to the remote control) in the driver's To open or close the window, press or pull
door lock. switch fully: the window opens or closes
completely when the switch is released.
Pressing the switch again stops the movement
Malfunction of the window.
When the ignition is switched on, and for

10 seconds afterwards, the flashing locking
The electric window switches remain
button indicates a system fault.
operational for approximately one minute
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
1. Front left electric window. after the key has been removed.
qualified workshop.
2. Front right electric window. Once this time has elapsed, the electric
3. Right-hand rear electric window. windows will not operate. To reactivate
4. Left-hand rear electric window. them, switch the ignition on again.
5. Deactivating the rear electric window
control switches.
Safety anti-pinch
Manual operation When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
To open or close the window, press or pull the In the event of unwanted opening of the window
switch gently. The window stops as soon as the when closing automatically, press the switch
switch is released. until the window opens completely, then pull
the switch immediately until the window closes.
Continue to hold the switch for approximately
one second after the window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
during this operation.
55
Access
Deactivating the rear Reinitialising the electric In the event of contact during operation
window controls windows of the windows, you must reverse the
movement of the window. To do this, press
Following reconnection of the battery, the
the switch concerned.
safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised.
When operating the passenger electric
The safety anti-pinch function is not active
window switches, the driver must ensure
during these operations.
that nothing is preventing correct closing
For each window:
of the windows.
- bring the window down completely,
The driver must ensure that the
then bring it back up. It will go up by a
passengers use the electric windows
few centimetres each time. Perform the
correctly.
operation again until the window is fully
Be particularly aware of children when
closed,
operating the windows.
- continue to pull the switch for at least one
Be aware of passengers or other persons
second after reaching this position, window
present when closing the windows using
closed.
For the safety of your children, press switch 5 the electronic key or the Keyless Entry
to prevent operation of the windows of the rear and Starting system.
doors, irrespective of their position.
With the warning lamp on, the rear switches

are deactivated. With the warning lamp off, the
switches are active.
56
Front seats Settings Backrest angle

As a safety measure, adjustments to the Longitudinal
driver's seat must only be done when
stationary.
Correct driving position
Before taking to the road and to make the most

3
of the ergonomics of your driving position, carry
out these adjustments in the following order:
- height of the head restraint,
- backrest angle,
- cushion height,
- longitudinal position of the seat,
- height of the steering wheel,
- the interior and door mirrors. F Turn the knob B to adjust the backrest.
F Raise the control A and slide the seat

forwards or backwards.
Once these adjustments have been made,

check the instrument panel can be viewed
correctly from your driving position.
57
Height Front head restraints Removing a head restraint

F Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.
(driver only) Height adjustment
F Press the lug A to release the head restraint
and remove it completely.
F Stow the head restraint securely.
Refitting a head restraint

F Introduce the head restraint rods into the
guides in the seat backrest.
F Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go.
F Press the lug A to free the head restraint
and push it down.
F Adjust the height of the head restraint.
Never drive with the head restraints

removed; they should be in place and
correctly adjusted for the occupant of the
F Pull the control C upwards to raise the seat Upward: seat.
or push it downwards to lower it, as many F pull the head restraint up to the desired
times as required, to obtain the desired position; the head restraint can be felt to
position. click into position.
Downward:
F press the lug A and push the head restraint
Before moving the seat backwards, down to the desired position.
ensure that there is no object or person in
the way, preventing full travel of the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching The adjustment is correct when the upper
passengers if present in the rear seats edge of the headrest is level with the top
or jamming the seat if large objects are of the head.
placed on the floor behind the seat.
58
Heated seats Do not use the function when the seat Prolonged use at the highest setting is
is not occupied. not recommended for those with sensitive
Reduce the intensity of the heating as skin.
soon as possible. There is a risk of burns for people whose
When the seat and passenger perception of heat is impaired (illness,
compartment have reached an taking medication, etc.).
3
adequate temperature, you can stop There is a risk of overheating the system if
the function; reducing the consumption material with insulating properties is used,
of electrical current reduces fuel such as cushions or seat covers.
consumption. Do not use the system:
- if wearing damp clothing,
- if child seats are fitted.
To avoid breaking the heating element in
the seat:
- do not place heavy objects on the seat,
F With the engine running, use the adjustment - do not kneel or stand on the seat,
knob to switch on and choose the heating - do not place sharp objects on the seat,
level desired: - do not spill liquids onto the seat.
To avoid the risk of short-circuit:
0: Off.
- do not use liquid products for cleaning
1: Low.
the seat,
2: Medium.
3: High. - never use the heating function when
the seat is damp.
The front seats can be heated individually.
59
Rear seats Folding the backrests

Bench seat with a fixed cushion and split
Folding or unfolding the seat backrests must
folding backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot
only be done with the vehicle stationary.
load space.
First steps:
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints can be removed.

To remove a head restraint:
F release the backrest using control 1,
F tilt the backrest slightly forwards,
F pull the head restraint as far up as it will go,
F press lug A to release the head restraint
and remove it completely,
F stow the head restraint.
To refit a head restraint:
F Drive the head restraint rods into the guides F lower the head restraints,
They have two positions: in the seat backrest. F if necessary, move the front seats forward,
- a high position, for when the seat is in use: F push the head restraint down as far as it will F check that nothing and no one could
F pull the head restraint fully up. go, interfere with the folding of the backrests
- a low position, for stowing, when the seat F press lug A and then push the head (clothing, luggage, etc.),
is not in use: restraint fully down. F check that the outer seat belts are lying
F press lug A to release the head restraint correctly on the backrests.
and push it fully down.
Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
removed; they must be in place and in the
high position.
The head restraint for the centre seat
and those for outer seats are not
interchangeable.
60
Steering wheel adjustment
3
F Press backrest release grip 1. F Put backrest 2 in the upright position and
F Guide backrest 2 down to the horizontal push on it to latch it home.
position. F Check that the red indicator is no longer F When stationary, pull the control lever to release
visible in release grip 1. the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
F Ensure that the outer seat belts are not F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving
trapped during the manoeuvre. position.
When the backrest is released, the red F Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel
indicator is visible in the release grip. adjustment mechanism.
Caution, a backrest that has not latched For safety reasons, these adjustments
correctly compromises the safety of must only be made with the vehicle
passengers in the event of sudden braking stationary.
Returning the backrests to or an impact.
their original position The contents of the boot may be thrown
forward – Risk of serious injury!
First check that the outer seat belts are

lying vertically alongside the backrest
latching rings.
61
Mirrors Manual adjustment Electric adjustment
Door mirrors
F Move control A to the right or to the left to

select the corresponding mirror.
F Operate the lever in the four directions to
F Move control in all four directions to adjust.
adjust the angle of the mirror glass.
F Return control to the central position.
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror allowing
for the lateral rear vision necessary for
overtaking or parking. They can also be folded
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
for parking in confined spaces.
be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots".
The objects observed are, in reality, closer
Manual folding
than they appear.
Take this into account in order to You can manually fold the mirrors (parking
Demisting – Defrosting correctly judge the distance of vehicles obstruction, narrow garage, etc.)
approaching from behind. F Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.
Demisting-defrosting of the door
mirrors operates with the engine
running, by switching on the heated
rear screen.
For more information on Demisting and

defrosting the rear window, refer to the
associated section.
62
Rear view mirror Automatic "electrochrome" Ventilation

model
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which Air intake
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, The air circulating in the passenger
headlamps from other vehicles, etc. compartment is filtered and originates either
3
from the outside via the grille located at the
Manual model base of the windscreen or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
Air treatment
This system automatically and progressively
The incoming air follows various routes
changes between day and night use by means
depending on the controls selected by the
of a sensor measuring the light coming from the
driver:
rear of the vehicle.
- direct arrival in the passenger compartment
(air intake),
In order to ensure optimum visibility during - passage through a heating circuit (heating),
your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens - passage through a cooling circuit (air
Adjustment automatically when reverse gear is conditioning).
F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is engaged.
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Control panel
Day / night position
F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti- Depending on equipment, the
dazzle position. controls for this system will be
F Push the lever to change to the normal accessible via the Air conditioning
"day" position. menu on the touch screen, or via the
centre console panel located below
the audio system.
The demisting/defrosting controls for the rear
screen are located below the touch screen, or
on the centre console panel located below the
audio system.
63
Air distribution Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully F To ensure correct operation of the
effective, follow the operation and air conditioning system, you are also
maintenance guidelines below: advised to have it checked regularly as
F To ensure that the air is distributed recommended in the maintenance and
evenly, keep the external air intake warranty guide.
grilles at the base of the windscreen, the F If the system does not produce cold air,
nozzles, the vents, the air outlets and switch it off and contact a CITROËN
the air extractor in the boot free from dealer or a qualified workshop.
obstructions. When towing the maximum load on a steep
F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, gradient in high temperatures, switching off
located on the dashboard; this is used the air conditioning increases the available
for regulation of the automatic air engine power and so improves the towing
conditioning system. ability.
F Operate the air conditioning system for To avoid the windows misting up and
at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a deterioration in the quality of the air:
month to keep it in perfect working order. - do not drive for too long with the
F Ensure that the passenger compartment ventilation switched off.
filter is in good condition and have the - do not keep air recirculation set for an
filter elements replaced regularly. We extended period.
recommend the use of a combined
passenger compartment filter. Thanks to
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents. its special active additive, it contributes
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting to the purification of the air breathed by
vents. the occupants and the cleanliness of
3. Adjustable and closable side air vent. the passenger compartment (reduction
4. Adjustable and closable central air vents. of allergic symptoms, bad odours and
5. Air outlets to the front footwells. greasy deposits).
6. Rear air outlets.
64
If after an extended stop in sunshine, Heating / Manual air Adjusting the air flow
the interior temperature is very
high, first ventilate the passenger
conditioning F Turn the thumb wheel to obtain a
comfortable air flow.
compartment for a few moments.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the Avoid driving for too long without
3
passenger compartment. ventilation (risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality).
The condensation created by the air The heating system works only when the
conditioning results in a discharge of water engine is running.
under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
Central and side air vents.
Stop & Start

The heating and air conditioning systems Footwells.
only work when the engine is running.
To maintain a comfortable temperature
in the passenger compartment, you can The manual air conditioning system operates Windscreen and footwells.
temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start with the engine running.
system.
For more information on Stop & Start, Windscreen.
refer to the corresponding section. Adjusting the temperature
F Turn the control from blue (cold) to red (hot)
to adjust the temperature to your liking.
The distribution of the air can be adjusted
by placing the control in an intermediate
position.
65
Air intake / Air Switching on Automatic air conditioning

recirculation F Press this button to switch on
the air conditioning.
Recirculation of the interior air isolates the The air conditioning system operates with
passenger compartment from exterior odours the engine running, but the ventilation and its
and fumes. The air conditioning cannot operate when controls are available with the ignition on.
This function can also be used to speed the air flow is set to off. Operation of the air conditioning and regulation
up the heating or cooling of the passenger of temperature, air flow and air distribution in
compartment. the passenger compartment are automatic.
F Press this button to choose the Switching off
F Select the Air conditioning
passenger compartment air
F Press this button again to switch menu in the touch screen to
intake mode
off the air conditioning. display the controls page for the
When the indicator lamp is off, the exterior air system.
intake function is activated.
When the indicator lamp is on, the air
recirculation function is activated, the intake of
exterior air is inhibited.
Air conditioning On / Off

The air conditioning is designed to operate
effectively in all seasons, with the windows
closed.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting Temperature adjustment
in winter, above 3°C.
F Press this button to increase the
value.
F Press this button to decrease
the value.
66
The value indicated corresponds to a level of "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by Manual control
comfort and not to a precise temperature. limiting air flow.
You can manually adjust the air flow and
"Normal": offers the best compromise between distribution.
Automatic comfort As soon as you modify a setting, the automatic
a comfortable temperature and quiet operation
programme (default setting). comfort programme is deactivated.
3
Activation / Deactivation "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. F Press the AUTO button to
F Press the AUTO button to activate the automatic comfort
activate or deactivate the This setting is associated with AUTO mode programme again.
automatic mode of the air only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode,
conditioning system. the last selected setting remains.
Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO
The air conditioning system operates mode if deactivated.
Air flow adjustment
automatically: the system manages the
F Press one of these buttons to
temperature, air flow and air distribution in
increase or decrease the air
the passenger compartment in an optimum
flow.
way according to the comfort level you have In cold weather with the engine cold, the
selected. air flow is increased gradually until the
comfort setting has been reached, in order The symbol for air flow (a fan) fills progressively
Automatic programme mode according to the air flow setting made.
setting to limit the delivery of cold air into the
passenger compartment. By reducing the air flow to a minimum, you are
F Go to the secondary page by On entering the vehicle, if the interior stopping ventilation.
pressing this button to adjust temperature is much colder or warmer "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
the automatic comfort program than the comfort value setting, there
by choosing one of the three is no need to alter the value displayed
available settings. in order to reach more quickly the
Avoid driving for too long with the
required level of comfort. The system
ventilation off (risk of misting and
F To change the current setting, compensates automatically and corrects
deterioration of air quality).
press the button several times the temperature difference as quickly as
Mode AUTO
in succession to access the possible.
desired mode:
67
Air distribution adjustment It enables you to: F Press this button to recirculate
- lower the temperature, in summer, the interior air.
You can vary the distribution of air in the passenger - increase the effectiveness of the demisting F Press this button again to allow
compartment using these three buttons. in winter, above 3°C. the intake of exterior air.
Windscreen.
Switching on
F Press this button to switch on Avoid the prolonged use of interior
the air conditioning. air recirculation (risk of misting and
Central and side vents. deterioration of air quality).
The air conditioning cannot operate when
the air flow is set to off.
Footwells.
Ventilation function with the
Switching off
ignition on
F Press this button again to switch When the ignition is switched on, you can
Each press on a button activates or deactivates use the ventilation system to adjust the air
off the air conditioning.
the function. flow settings and the air distribution in the
passenger compartment depending on the
The three buttons can be activated battery charge.
simultaneously. In this case, the flows of Air intake / Air recirculation This function does not operate the air
air from the central and side vents and the
conditioning.
footwell vents are favoured.
The intake of exterior air helps avoid and
eliminate misting of the windscreen and side
windows.
The recirculation of interior air prevents exterior
Air conditioning On / Off odours and smoke from entering the passenger
compartment.
The air conditioning is designed to operate This function also allows faster heating
effectively in all seasons, with the windows or cooling of the air in the passenger
closed. compartment.
68
Front demist – defrost With touch screen Rear screen demist –

Switching on defrost
These markings on the control F Press this button. Switching on
panels indicate the control positions The light in the button comes on.
for rapid demisting or defrosting of F Press this button to demist/
3
the windscreen and side windows. defrost the rear screen and,
During the winter period, direct The system automatically manages the air depending on version, the door
the side air vents towards the side conditioning, air flow and air intake, and mirrors. The button indicator
windows to optimise their demisting provides optimum distribution towards the lamp goes on.
and defrosting. windscreen and side windows.
Switching off
Switching off
Defrosting switches off automatically to prevent
With control panel on the F Press this button again to switch it off. excessive electrical consumption.
centre console The light in the button goes off.
F It is possible to stop the defrosting operation
before it is switched off automatically by
Switching on pressing this button again. The indicator
lamp in the button goes off.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
F Put the temperature and air flow controls to
been activated, the STOP mode is not
the dedicated marked position.
available. Switch off the heating of the rear
F Set the air distribution control to the
"Windscreen" position. screen and door mirrors as soon as
you judge it possible, as reducing
the consumption of electrical current
reduces fuel consumption.
Switching off
F Put the air flow control to the fan position.
Rear screen demisting – defrosting can

only be operated when the engine is
running.
69
Permanently off.
Courtesy lamp Panoramic glass sunroof
Permanent lighting. It includes a concealing flap in two parts that
improves thermal and acoustic comfort in the
passenger compartment.
In permanent lighting mode, the lighting time Opening

varies according to the circumstances:
- when the ignition is off, approximately ten
minutes,
- in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
1. Courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
Map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the
Courtesy light corresponding switch. F Pull the blind backwards until it locks.
In this position, the courtesy lamp
comes on gradually:
Take care not to put anything in contact
with the courtesy lamp.
Closing
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- on opening a door,
- when the remote control locking button is
activated in order to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
F Pull the blind forwards until it locks.
70
Boot lighting Interior fittings 1.

2.
Sun visor.
Glove box.
3. 12 V power socket (max 120W).
4. USB socket.
5. Jack auxiliary socket.
6. Open storage with double cup holder.
7. Front armrest.
3
8. Storage wells.
9. Mats.
This comes on automatically when the boot is Sun visor

opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
There are different light times:
- when the ignition is off, approximately ten
minutes,
- in energy saving mode, approximately thirty
seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
The driver's sun visor is fitted with a vanity

mirror with concealing flap and a map holder
(or ticket holder).
Do not attach or hang anything from the

sun visor on the passenger side as this
could cause injuries when the frontal airbag
is being deployed (fitted in the roof).
71
Glove box Do not exceed the maximum power rating When the USB port is used, the portable
of the socket (you may otherwise damage device charges automatically.
your portable device). A message is displayed if the power drawn
by the portable device exceeds the current
supplied by the vehicle.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
USB charger, may adversely affect the
For more information about using this
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
equipment, please refer to the "Audio and
causing faults such as poor telephone
telematics" section.
reception or interference with displays in
the screens.
Auxiliary socket (JACK)
USB port
It can be used to hold a water bottle, the
vehicle's handbook pack, etc.
12 V socket
It allows the connection of a portable device so
that you can listen to your music files via the
vehicle's speakers.
It allows the connection of a portable device or The management of the files is done using your
a USB memory stick. portable device.
It reads the audio files which are sent to your
audio system and played via the vehicle's For more information about using this
F To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum
speakers. equipment, please refer to the "Audio and
power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in the
You can manage these files using the steering telematics" section.
correct adapter.
mounted or audio system controls.
72
Front armrest Mats F refit the fixings by pressing,

F check that the mat is secured correctly.
Height adjustment Fitting
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
driver's side, use only the fixings provided.
- only use mats which are suited to the
The other mats are simply placed on the
3
fixings already present in the vehicle;
carpet.
these fixings must be used,
Removing - never place one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
CITROËN may interfere with access to
F move the seat as far back as possible,
the pedals and hinder the operation of the
F unclip the fixings,
cruise control / speed limiter.
F Lower the armrest completely. F remove the mat.
The mats approved by CITROËN have two
F Lift it again to the desired position (low,
intermediate or high). Refitting fixings located below the seat.
F Once it is in the high position, lift it to unlock To refit the mat on the driver's side:
it and bring it to the low position. F position the mat correctly,
Clothes hooks
They are located above each rear door.
73
Boot fittings Storage box Hooks
These can be used to secure shopping bags.
F Pull back the boot carpet to access the Take care to only hang up lightweight bags.
storage box.
Depending on configuration, it includes Rear shelf

1. Rear parcel shelf. dedicated storage fittings:
2. Hooks. - towing eye,
3. Under floor storage. - temporary puncture repair kit,
4. Lighting. - warning triangle,
5. Stowing rings. - etc.
6. Warning triangle.
For the versions with a storage box: it

must be put back in place before loading
the boot. To remove the shelf:
F unhook the two cords,
F gently lift the shelf, then remove it.
There are several ways of storing it:
- either upright behind the front seats,
- or flat on the bottom of the boot.
74
Warning triangle Rear shelf (corporate

As a safety precaution, before leaving your version)
vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch
on the hazard warning lamps and put on your
high visibility vest.
3
The triangle can be stored on the back panel of
the boot, attached with straps.
Assembling the triangle

Refer to the assembling instructions provided Do not place objects above the load
with the triangle. restraint.
Positioning the triangle

F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as
required by local legislation.
If your vehicle is equipped with a protective

grille, you can place objects above the load
restraint.
It allows the interior of the vehicle to be masked

in addition to the existing shelf.
75
Do not place hard or heavy objects on the

rear shelf.
They can become dangerous projectiles in
the event of a sudden braking or impact.
To access the spare wheel on corporate

versions:
- Remove the storage well.
- Lift the articulated floor.
- Remove the chock.
76
Lighting and visibility
Lighting control stalk In some weather conditions (e.g. low Without AUTO lighting
temperature or humidity), the presence
Main lighting of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
The front and rear lamps on the vehicle
normal; it disappears after the lamps have
are designed to adapt the driver's visibility
been on for a few minutes.
progressively according to the climatic
conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
4
dazzling other drivers, Travelling abroad
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when If planning to use your vehicle in a country
With AUTO lighting
the road is clear. that drives on the other side of the road,
the headlamp dipped beams must be
adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming
Additional lighting drivers. Contact the CITROËN or qualified
Other lamps are provided (depending on workshop dealer.
version) to meet the requirements of particular
driving conditions: Selection ring for main
- a rear foglamp, lighting mode
- front foglamps,
- daytime running lamps to be more visible Turn to align the desired symbol with the mark.
If one or more lamps fails, a message
during the day,
asks you to check the lamp or lamps
- guide-me-home lighting to facilitate your Lighting off / Daytime running lamps.
concerned.
exit from the vehicle,
- parking lamps as vehicle position markers.
Side lights only.
Programming
You can adjust the settings of certain functions: Dipped or main beam headlights.
- guide-me-home lighting,
- welcome lighting,
- daytime running lamps. Automatic illumination of headlamps.
77
Dipping the headlamps Rear fog light only F forwards a second time to switch on the rear
foglamp,
F once rearwards to switch off the rear
foglamp,
F rearwards a second time to switch off the
front foglamps.
If the lights are switched off automatically
(version with AUTO lighting) or the dipped
beams are switched off manually, the foglamps
and sidelamps remain on.
F Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the
It operates with the sidelamps on. foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
F To switch it on, turn the ring forwards.
Pull the lever to switch the lighting between
When the lighting is switched off automatically
dipped and main beam headlights.
(version with AUTO lighting), the foglamp and
In the lighting off and side lights modes, the the dipped beam headlamps will remain on. In good or rainy weather, both day and
driver can switch on the main beam headlights F To switch it off, turn the ring rearwards. night, using the front foglamps and the
temporarily ("headlight flash") by keeping the rear foglamp is prohibited. In these
lever pulled. situations, the power of their beams may
dazzle other drivers. They should only be
Front fog lights and rear used in fog or falling snow.
Display fog light In these weather conditions, it is your
responsibility to switch on the foglamps
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
and dipped beam headlamps manually as
light in the instrument panel confirms that the
the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
lighting selected is on.
light.
Do not forget to turn off the front foglamps
and the rear foglamp as soon as they are
Foglamp selection ring no longer necessary.
The foglamps operate with the dipped and main Rotate and release the ring:
beam headlamps. F once forwards to switch on the front
foglamps,
78
Switching off the lights when the Direction indicators Automatic illumination of
ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of the
(flashing) headlamps
lights turn off immediately, except for When a low level of ambient light is detected
dipped beam if automatic guide-me-home by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps,
lighting is activated. sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
switched on automatically, without any action
on the part of the driver. They can also come
on if rain is detected, at the same time as
Switching on the lighting after the
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
4
ignition is switched off
As soon as the brightness returns to a
To reactivate the lighting control, set the
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
ring to 0 – lamps off, then to the desired
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
position.
automatically.
When the driver's door is opened, a F Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the
temporary audible signal warns you that point of resistance.
the vehicle's lighting is on. F Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the
The lamps, with the exception of the point of resistance.
Switching on
sidelamps, switch off automatically after
a maximum duration of 30 minutes to
prevent discharging of the battery. Three flashes
F Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will flash
3 times.
F Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position.

When the function is activated, a message is
also displayed.
79
Switching off Daytime running lamps/ Parking lamps

F Turn the ring to another position. Sidelamps Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of
Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the sidelamps on the traffic side only.
the display of a message.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the

sunshine sensor, the lighting comes
on, this warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel associated with
an audible signal and/or a message.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a The front and rear lamps light up automatically
qualified workshop. when the engine starts.
F Depending on version, within one minute
They provide the following functions:
of switching off the ignition, operate the
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled - Daytime running lamps (lighting control
lighting control stalk up or down depending
with the rain sensor and located at the stalk at position "0" or "AUTO" with
on the traffic side (e.g. when parking on the
top centre of the windscreen behind the adequate light level).
left, lighting control stalk upwards, the right-
rear view mirror; the associated functions - Sidelamps (lighting control stalk in "AUTO"
hand sidelamps are on).
would no longer be controlled. position with low light levels or "Sidelamps
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
only" or "dipped/main beam headlamps").
illumination of the corresponding direction
indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may lighting control stalk to the central position.
detect sufficient light. In this case, the In daytime running lamps, the diodes are
lighting will not come on automatically. brighter.
80
Switching on
Guide-me-home lighting F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
Automatic exterior
using the lighting stalk. welcome lighting
F A further "headlamp flash" switches the
Automatic With the "Automatic headlamp illumination"
function off.
function activated, under low ambient light, the
With the "Automatic headlamp illumination" sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps come
function activated (lighting control stalk on Switching off on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.
AUTO), under low ambient light, the dipped Manual follow-me lighting goes off
beam headlamps come on automatically when automatically at the end of a given period of
the ignition is switched off. time. Activation, deactivation and the duration of the
4
exterior welcome lighting are set in the vehicle
Activation, deactivation and duration of the parameters menu.
guide-me-home lighting are set in the vehicle
parameters menu.
Manual
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam

headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
81
Automatic headlamp Activation / Deactivation

dipping F Turn the lighting control stalk ring to the
"AUTO" position.
System which automatically changes between
dipped and main beam according to the F In the Vehicle / Driving menu,
ambient light level and the driving conditions, select the "Driving functions"
using a camera located at the top of the tab, then "Automatic headlamp
windscreen. dip".
F Flash the headlamps (going
beyond the point of resistance)
to activate the function.
This system is a driving aid.
The driver remains responsible for the
vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the The system state remains in memory when the
prevailing conditions of light, visibility, ignition is switched off.
traffic and observation of driving and
vehicle regulations.
Operation
The system will be operational as soon as If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if
you have exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h). the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of
If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), the main beam headlamps:
the system no longer operates.
- dipped beam is maintained, this
indicator lamp comes on in the
instrument panel.
If the ambient light level is very low and the

traffic conditions permit:
- main beam comes on
automatically: this indicator
lamp comes on in the instrument
panel.
82
When the system detects thick fog, it

temporarily deactivates the function.
The system may suffer interference or not Headlight beam height
As soon as the vehicle leaves the area of thick
work correctly:
- under poor visibility conditions (snow,
adjustment
fog, the function reactivates automatically.
heavy rain, etc.),
- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or
This indicator lamp goes off while obscured (by a sticker, etc.) in front of
the function is deactivated. the camera,
- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective
signs.
Pause When the system detects thick fog, it
4
If the situation requires a change of headlamp temporarily deactivates the function.
beam, the driver can take over at any time. The system is not able to detect: To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
F Flashing the headlamps pauses the function - road users that do not have their own users, the height of the headlamp beams
and the system changes to "automatic lighting, such as pedestrians, should be adjusted according to the load in the
illumination of headlamps" mode: - vehicles whose lighting is obscured vehicle.
- if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" (for example: vehicles running behind a 0. Driver or driver + front passenger.
indicator lamps are on, the system safety barrier on a motorway), -. Driver + front passenger + rear
changes to main beam, - vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep passengers.
- if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator slope, on twisty roads, on crossroads.
1. Driver + front passenger + rear
lamps are on, the system changes to
passengers + load in the boot.
dipped beam.
-. Driver + front passenger + rear
To reactivate the function, flash the headlamps
passengers + load in the boot.
again.
2. Driver on his own + maximum authorised
load in the boot.
The initial setting is position 0.
83
Wiper control stalk With AUTO wiping Rear wiper

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or
frost present on the windscreen, around
the wiper arms and blades and the
windscreen seal, before operating the
wipers.
Rear wiper selection ring:
Windscreen wipers
Do not operate the wipers on a dry Off.
Wiping speed control lever: raise or lower the
windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold
lever to the desired position.
conditions, ensure that the wiper blades Intermittent wiping (proportional to
are not stuck to the windscreen before the speed of the vehicle).
operating the wipers.
Fast wiping (heavy rain).
Wash-wipe (set duration).
Normal wiping (moderate rain).

Manual controls
Intermittent wiping (proportional to
Reverse gear
The windscreen wipers are controlled directly
the speed of the vehicle). When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
by the driver.
Off. will come into operation automatically if the
windscreen wipers are operating.
With manual wiping
Activation or deactivation of this automatic
Single wipe (press downwards or
function can only be set via the touch screen.
pull the stalk briefly towards you,
then release).
F In the Vehicle / Driving menu,
select the "Vehicle settings"
or
tab.
Automatic wiping (press down, F Select "Comfort"/ "Security"
then release) or single wipe (pull then "Rear wiper in reverse" /
the stalk briefly towards you). "Wiping in reverse".
84
This system is activated by default. To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do

not operate the windscreen washer if the
windscreen washer reservoir is empty.
If a significant accumulation of snow or ice Only operate the windscreen washer if
is present, or when using a bicycle carrier there is no risk of the fluid freezing on the
on the boot, deactivate the automatic rear windscreen and hindering visibility. Always
wiper. use windscreen washer fluid suitable for
low temperatures during the winter period.
Front screenwash
Special position of the

windscreen wipers
4
F Operate the wiper stalk within one minute
This position permits release of the windscreen after switching off the ignition to position the
wiper blades. wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.
It is used for cleaning or replacing the wiper F To park the wiper blades again, switch on
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
To maintain the effectiveness of the wiper

blades, it is advisable to:
- handle them with care,
Pull the wiper control stalk towards you. The - clean them regularly using soapy
screenwash and then the wiper operate for a water,
set period of time. - avoid using them to retain cardboard
on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of wear.
The screenwash jets are not adjustable. Do
not try to move them (risk of damage).
85
Automatic windscreen The automatic rain sensitive windscreen

wipers wipers must be reactivated by pushing the
control stalk downwards, if the ignition has
been off for more than one minute.
The windscreen wipers operate automatically

once rain is detected (sensor behind the If a fault occurs with the automatic rain
rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in
intensity of the rain without any action on the intermittent mode.
part of the driver. Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Switching on
Give a short downwards push to the control. Do not cover the rain sensor combined with
A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction the sunshine sensor and located in the top
has been accepted. centre of the windscreen, behind the rear
This symbol appears in the instrument panel view mirror.
display screen and a message is displayed. When using an automatic car wash, switch
off the automatic rain sensitive wipers.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice before
Switching off activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.
Give the control stalk a brief push

downwards or place the control stalk
in another position (Int, 1 or 2).
This symbol disappears from the
instrument panel display screen and
a message is displayed.
86
Safety
General safety We draw your attention to the following Installation of accessory radio
recommendations points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment or
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
accessories not listed by CITROËN transmitter, you must contact a CITROËN
may cause excessive current dealer for the specification of transmitters
consumption and faults and failures which can be fitted (frequency, maximum
Labels are attached in different places of with the electrical system of your power, aerial position, specific installation
your vehicle. They include safety warnings vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer requirements), in line with the Vehicle
as well as identification information of your for information on the range of Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
vehicle. Do not remove them: they are an recommended accessories. (2004/104/EC).
integral part of your vehicle. - As a safety measure, access to
the diagnostic socket, used for the
vehicle's electronic systems, is
5
reserved strictly for CITROËN dealers
or qualified workshops, equipped
with the special tools required (risk
For any work on your vehicle, use a of malfunctions of the vehicle's
qualified workshop that has the technical Depending on country regulations, some
electronic systems that could cause
information, skills and equipment required, safety equipment may be compulsory:
breakdowns or serious accidents).
all of which a CITROËN dealer is able to high visibility safety vests, warning
The manufacturer cannot be held
provide. triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
responsible if this advice is not
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit,
followed.
mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc.
- Any modification or adaptation not
intended or authorised by CITROËN
or carried out without meeting the
technical requirements defined by
the manufacturer will result in the
suspension of the legal and contractual
warranties.
87
Safety
Emergency warning lamps Horn Emergency or assistance

call (type 1)
F When you press this red button, all four

direction indicators flash.
It can operate with the ignition off.
F Press the central part of the steering wheel.
Automatic operation of Localised Emergency Call
hazard warning lights
In an emergency, press this
When braking in an emergency, depending
button for more than 2 seconds.
on the deceleration, the hazard warning lights
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you The flashing green LED and the voice message
accelerate. confirm that the call has been made to the
F You can also switch them off by pressing service "Localised Emergency Call"*.
the button.
Pressing this button again
immediately cancels the request.
The green LED goes off.
The green LED remains on (without flashing)

when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
88
Safety
"Localised Emergency Call" immediately Operation of the system Pressing this button again
locates your vehicle, contacts you in your own immediately cancels the request.
language** and – if necessary – requests that When the ignition is switched on,
relevant emergency services be dispatched**. the green indicator lamp comes
In countries where the service is not available, on for 3 seconds indicating that The cancellation is confirmed by a voice
or when the locating service has been the system is operating correctly. message.
expressly declined, the call is sent directly The orange indicator lamp ** According to the geographic coverage of
to the emergency services (112) without the flashes then goes off: the system "Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
vehicle location. has a fault. Assistance Call" and the official national
language chosen by the owner of the
If an impact is detected by the airbag vehicle.
The orange indicator lamp is on fixed: the back-
control unit, and independently of the The list of countries covered and Telematic
up battery should be replaced.
deployment of any airbags, an emergency services is available from dealers or at
In both cases, the emergency and assistance
call is made automatically. www.citroen.co.uk.
5
calls service may not work.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
* In accordance with the general conditions possible. Geolocation
of use for the service available from dealers
and subject to technological and technical
limitations.
The fault with the system does not prevent
the vehicle from being driven. You can deactivate geolocation by
** As per the geographic coverage of
"Localised Emergency Call", "Localised simultaneously pressing the "Localised
Assistance Call" and the official national Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance
language chosen by the owner of the Localised Assistance Call Call" buttons, followed by a press on "Localised
vehicle. Assistance Call" to confirm.
Press this button for more than
The list of countries covered and Telematic
2 seconds to request assistance
services is available at dealers or on
if the vehicle breaks down.
www.citroen.co.uk.
To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press

A voice message confirms that the call has
the "Localised Emergency Call" and "Localised
been made**.
Assistance Call" buttons again, followed by
a press on "Localised Assistance Call" to
confirm.
89
Safety
"Localised Emergency Call" immediately

If you purchased your vehicle outside the Emergency or assistance locates your vehicle, contacts you in your own
CITROËN dealer network, we invite you to
have a dealer check the configuration of
call (type 2) language**, and – if necessary – requests the
relevant emergency services be dispatched. In
these services and, if desired, modified to
countries where the service is not available, or
suit your wishes.
when the locating service has been expressly
In a multilingual country, configuration is
declined, the call is sent directly to the
possible in the official national language
emergency services (112) without the vehicle
of your choice.
location.
For technical reasons, particularly to If an impact is detected by the airbag

improve the quality of Telematic services control unit, and independently of the
to customers, the manufacturer reserves deployment of any airbags, an emergency
the right to carry out updates to the call is made automatically.
vehicle's on-board telematic system. Localised Emergency Call
* In accordance with the general conditions
In an emergency, press this of use for the service available from dealers
button for more than 2 seconds. and subject to technological and technical
If you benefit from the Citroën Connect Box The flashing green LED and limitations.
offer with the SOS and assistance pack the voice message confirm
that the call has been made ** As per the geographic coverage of
included, there are additional services
to the "Localised Emergency "Localised Emergency Call", "Localised
available to you in your personal space, via
Call"service*. Assistance Call" and the official national
the Internet website for your country.
language chosen by the owner of the
Pressing this button again vehicle.
immediately cancels the call. The list of countries covered and Telematic
The green LED goes off. services is available from dealers or on the
website for your country.
The green LED remains on (without flashing)
when communication is established.
It goes off at the end of the call.
90
Safety
Operation of the system Localised Assistance Call

When the ignition is switched on, Press this button for more than
the green indicator lamp comes 2 seconds to request assistance To reactivate geolocation, simultaneously press
on for 3 seconds indicating that if the vehicle breaks down. the "Localised Emergency Call" and "Localised
the system is operating correctly.
Assistance Call" buttons again, followed by
A voice message confirms that the call has a press on "Localised Assistance Call" to
For all countries except Russia, Belarus
been made**. confirm.
and Kazakhstan.
Pressing this button again
The red indicator lamp flashes
immediately cancels the request. If you purchased your vehicle outside the
then goes off: there is a system
Brand network, we invite you to check
fault.
the configuration of these services and,
The red indicator lamp is on continuously: The cancellation is confirmed by a voice if desired, have a dealer change it to suit
5
replace the back-up battery. message. your wishes. In a multilingual country,
** According to the geographic coverage of configuration is possible in the official
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. "Localised Emergency Call", "Localised national language of your choice.
Assistance Call" and the official national
The red indicator lamp is on language chosen by the owner of the
continuously: there is a system vehicle.
fault. For technical reasons, particularly to
The list of countries covered and Telematic
improve the quality of "Telematic services
services is available from dealers or at
The red indicator lamp flashes: replace the to customers, the manufacturer reserves
www.citroen.co.uk.
back-up battery. the right to carry out updates to the
vehicle's on-board telematic system.
In either case, the emergency and assistance Geolocation
calls may not function.
Contact a qualified repairer as soon as
possible. If you benefit from the Citroën Connect
Box offer with the SOS and assistance
You can deactivate geolocation by pack included, there are additional
simultaneously pressing the "Localised services available to you in your personal
The fault with the system does not prevent Emergency Call" and "Localised Assistance space, via the Internet website for your
the vehicle from being driven. Call" buttons, followed by a press on "Localised country.
Assistance Call" to confirm.
91
Safety
distance. The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive

Electronic stability It is triggered in relation to the speed at which carefully at moderate speed.
programme (ESC) the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a
reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an If this warning lamp comes on, in
Electronic stability control (ESC) comprising
increase in the effectiveness of the braking. conjunction with the STOP and ABS
the following systems:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS) and warning lamps, an audible signal and a
message, it means that the electronic
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
- emergency braking assistance (EBA), brake force distribution (EBD) is defective.
- wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction The ASR system (also known as Traction
Control) optimises traction in order to limit You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is
control,
wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving safe to do so.
- dynamic stability control (DSC).
wheels and on the engine. It also improves In both cases, have the system checked by a
the directional stability of the vehicle on CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as
Definitions acceleration. soon as possible.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Dynamic stability control (DSC)

and electronic brake force When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
distribution (EBFD) If there is a difference between the path ensure that these are approved for your
followed by the vehicle and that required by vehicle.
This system improves the stability and When operating under normal conditions,
the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking the ABS may cause the brake pedal to
automatically acts on the brake of one or more
and contributes towards improved control on vibrate slightly.
wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle
corners, in particular on poor or slippery road
to the required path, within the limits of the laws
surfaces.
of physics.
The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of
In emergency braking, press the brake
emergency braking.
pedal hard and maintain this pressure.
The electronic brake force distribution system Anti-lock braking system
manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
(ABS) and electronic brake
Emergency braking assistance force distribution (EBD)
(EBA) After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
In an emergency, this system enables you to When lit up continuously, this qualified workshop.
reach the optimum braking pressure more warning lamp indicates a fault with
quickly and therefore reduce the stopping the ABS.
92
Safety
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) / Reactivating the ASR using the ASR / DSC
Dynamic stability control touch screen These systems offer increased safety
(DSC) The system is reactivated automatically every in normal driving, but they should not
time the ignition is switched back on or from encourage the driver to take extra risks or
drive at high speed.
Operation 30 mph (50 km/h).
Below 30 mph (50 km/h), you can reactivate it It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain,
These systems are activated automatically snow, black ice) that the risk of loss of grip
manually.
every time the vehicle is started. increases. It is therefore important for your
They come into operation in the event of a The function is reactivated via the safety to keep these systems activated in
problem with grip or trajectory. touch screen’s Vehicle /Driving all conditions, and particularly in difficult
menu. conditions.
It is confirmed by the display of a The correct operation of these
This is indicated by this warning light
message. systems depends on observation of
flashing in the instrument panel.
5
the manufacturer's recommendations
regarding as much the wheels (tyres and
Operating fault rims), braking and electronic components
as the assembly and repair procedures
Deactivating the ASR using the The illumination of this warning
used by CITROËN dealers.
touch screen lamp, accompanied by an audible
To benefit in full from the effectiveness
signal and a message, indicates that
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle of these systems in wintry conditions,
there is a fault with the system.
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft the vehicle must be fitted with four snow
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified tyres, allowing the vehicle to retain neutral
the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn workshop to have the system checked. behaviour on the road.
freely and regain grip.
Reactivate the system when grip conditions
allow. After an impact, have the system checked
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The function is deactivated via the
touch screen’s Vehicle / Driving
menu.
It is confirmed by the display of a
message.
93
Safety
Seat belts Rear seat belts Seat belt not fastened /

unfastened alerts
Front seat belts
LCD picto instrument panel.
A. Front left seat belt not fastened /

unfastened warning lamp.
B. Front right seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
Each of the rear seats has a belt, with three
The front seat belts are fitted with a
fixing points and an inertia reel.
pretensioning and force limiting system. LCD text instrument panel.
The outer seats are fitted with a pretensioning
This system improves safety in the front
and force limiter.
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the passengers.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when Locking
the ignition is on. C. Front and rear seat belts not fastened /
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the F Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the unfastened warning lamp.
seat belt on the chest of the passenger, so buckle.
improving their protection. F Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unlocking
F Press the red button on the buckle.
F Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
94
Safety
Front seat belt warning lamp(s)

When switching on the ignition,
warning lamp(s) A and/or B or C
light(s) up red on the instrument
panel and the corresponding (1 or 2)
warning lamp(s) light(s) red in the
belt and front passenger airbag
warning lamp display screen if
the driver and/or the front/rear
passenger(s) has (have) not
fastened or has (have) unfastened
1. Front left seat belt warning lamp. their seat belt.
2. Front right seat belt warning lamp.
5
3. Rear right seat belt warning lamp. Rear seat belt warning lamp(s)
4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp.
The corresponding (3 to 5) warning
5. Rear left seat belt warning lamp. lamp lights up red in the seat belt
and front passenger airbag display
From approximately 12 mph screen when one or more rear
(20 km/h), this or these warning passengers unfastens their seat
lamp(s) flash for two minutes belts.
accompanied by an audible signal.
Once these two minutes have
elapsed, this or these warning
lamps remain on until the driver or
the front passenger and/or the rear
passenger(s) fasten their seat belt.
95
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use In order to be effective, a seat belt must: Recommendations for children
the seat belts correctly and that they are all - be tightened as close to the body as Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
fastened before setting off. possible, less than 12 years old or shorter than one and
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth a half metres.
always fasten your seat belt, even for short movement, checking that it does not twist, Never use the same seat belt to secure more
journeys. - be used to restrain only one person, than one person.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as - not show any signs of cuts or fraying, Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
they will not fulfil their role fully. - not be converted or modified to avoid For more information on Child seats, refer to
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel affecting its performance. the corresponding section.
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is In accordance with current safety regulations,
In the event of an impact
stowed automatically when not in use. for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go
Depending on the nature and seriousness
Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt to a qualified workshop with the skills and
of the impact, the pyrotechnic device may
is reeled in correctly. equipment needed, which a CITROËN dealer
be deployed before and independently of the
The lower part of the strap must be positioned is able to provide.
airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners
as low as possible on the pelvis. Have your seat belts checked regularly by
is accompanied by a slight discharge of
The upper part must be positioned in the a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
hollow of the shoulder. particularly if the straps show signs of
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
The rollers have an automatic blocking device damage.
incorporated in the system.
at the time of a collision, during sudden Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
braking or if the vehicle turns over. You can a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN
on.
release the device by pulling the strap firmly dealers.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
system checked, and, if necessary, replaced,
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
and reeled in correctly.
workshop.
96
Safety
Airbags Impact detection zones Front airbags

General information
System designed to contribute towards
improving the safety of the occupants (with
the exception of the centre rear passenger)
in the event of violent collisions. The airbags
supplement the action of the seat belts fitted
with force limiters (with the exception of the
centre rear passenger belt).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors This system protects the driver and front
record and analyse the front and side impacts A. Frontal impact zone. passenger in the event of a severe frontal
sustained in the impact detection zones: impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the
B. Side impact zone.
5
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags head and chest.
are deployed instantly and contribute The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
towards better protection of the occupants steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
Airbag deployment generates slight
of the vehicle (with the exception of the fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
smoke emissions and a noise, due to the
centre rear passenger); immediately after
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so
incorporated in the system.
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of
Although this smoke is not harmful,
the occupants, Deployment
sensitive individuals may experience slight
- in the case of a minor or rear impact or
irritation. The airbags are deployed, except the
in certain rollover conditions, the airbags
The noise generated by the deployment passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in
may not be deployed; the seat belt
of one or more airbags (detonation) the event of a serious front impact to all or part
alone contributes towards ensuring your
may result in mild and temporary loss of of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal
protection in these situations.
hearing. centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the front to the rear of the
The airbags do not operate when the
vehicle.
ignition is switched off.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
This equipment will only deploy once. If a
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
second impact occurs (during the same or
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
a subsequent accident), the airbag will not
dashboard, passenger's side, to cushion their
be deployed again.
forward movement.
97
Safety
Operating fault Deployment Malfunction

If this lamp in the instrument panel The lateral airbag is deployed unilaterally in If this warning light on the instrument
comes on, you must contact a the event of a severe side impact covering all panel comes on, you must contact
CITROËN dealer or a qualified or part of side impact zone B, perpendicular to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a workshop to have the system
checked. The airbags might no horizontal plane and directed from the outside checked.
longer fire in a crash. towards the inside of the vehicle.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip
event of a serious impact.
and shoulder of the front passenger and the
Lateral airbags corresponding door trim panel.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on
the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls
Lateral airbags over, the airbags may not be deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
System contributing towards greater protection none of the lateral airbags is deployed.
for the driver and passengers (with the
exception of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact in order to limit
the risk of injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
This system protects the driver and front

passenger in the event of a severe side impact Deployment
to minimise the risk of injury to the chest,
between hip and shoulder. The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
frame, door side. event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
98
Safety
Advice
For the airbags to be fully effective, Front airbags Lateral airbags
observe the safety recommendations Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its Use only approved covers on the seats,
below. spokes or resting your hands on the centre compatible with the deployment of the lateral
Adopt a normal and upright sitting position. part of the wheel. airbags. For information on the range of seat
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Passengers must not place their feet on the covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
Do not leave anything between the occupants dashboard. contact a CITROËN dealer.
and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags
fix or attach anything close to or in the way of can cause burns or the risk of injury from a
the airbag release trajectory; this could cause cigarette or pipe.
Do not attach or hang anything to the seat
injuries during their deployment. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or
backrests (clothes, etc.) as this could cause
Never modify the original definition of your hit it violently.
injuries to the thorax or arm when the side
5
vehicle, particularly in the area directly Do not fit or attach anything to the steering
airbag is deployed.
around the airbags. wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
After an accident or if the vehicle has been in case of airbag deployment.
nearer to the door than necessary.
stolen, have the airbag systems checked.
The vehicle's front door panels include side
All work on the airbag system must be carried
impact sensors.
out by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
Curtain airbags A damaged door or any unauthorised or
workshop.
Do not attach anything or hang anything to incorrectly executed work (modification or
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
the roof, as this could cause head injuries repair) on the front doors or their interior trim
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
when the curtain airbag is deployed. could compromise the operation of these
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
If fitted to your vehicle, do not remove the sensors – Risk of malfunction of the lateral
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
grab handles installed on the roof, they play a airbags!
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
part in securing the curtain airbags. Such work must only be done by a CITROËN
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
99
Safety
General points relating to Child seat at the rear "Forward facing"

child seats "Rearward facing"
Although one of the main criteria of CITROËN
when designing your vehicle, the safety of your
children also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- In accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in an approved child seat suited to
their weight and installed on a vehicle seat
fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings.* When a "forward facing" child seat is installed
- Statistically, the safest seats in your on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's
vehicle for carrying children are the rear When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed front seat forward and straighten the backrest
seats. on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's so that the legs of the child in the forward
- A child weighing less than 9 kg must front seat forward and straighten the backrest facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front
travel in the rearward facing position so that the rearward facing child seat does not seat.
both in the front and in the rear. touch the vehicle's front seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly

tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
that the latter is in firm contact with the
CITROËN recommends that children floor. If necessary, adjust the front seat of
should travel on the rear seats of your the vehicle.
vehicle:
- "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
- "forward facing" over the age of 3.
Centre rear seat
* The legislation on carrying children is A child seat with a support leg must never be
specific to each country. Consult the installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
legislation in force in your country.
100
Safety
Child seat at the front "Forward facing"

(Refer to the current legislation in your country
before installing your child on this seat.)
"Rearward facing"
Passenger seat adjusted to the rearmost

When a forward facing child seat is installed on longitudinal position.
5
the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's
seat to the rearmost longitudinal position
with seat backrest straightened and leave the
passenger's front airbag activated.
When a rearward facing child seat is installed

Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
on the front passenger seat, adjust the
tensioned.
vehicle’s seat to the rearmost longitudinal
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
position, with the backrest straightened.
that the latter is in firm contact with the
floor. If necessary, adjust the passenger
The passenger's front airbag must be seat.
deactivated. Otherwise, the child would
risk being seriously injured or killed if
the airbag were deployed.
101
Safety
The warning label present on both sides of the Deactivating the

Deactivating the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice.
passenger's front airbag In line with current legislation, this warning is
passenger's front airbag
available in all of the languages required. Only the passenger's front airbag can be
Never install a rearward facing child deactivated.
restraint system on a seat protected by an
active front airbag.
This could cause the death of the child or
serious injury. Passenger airbag OFF
For more information on the Airbags,

F With the ignition off, insert the key in the
passenger airbag deactivation switch.
F Turn it to the OFF position.
F Remove the key keeping the switch in this
position.
When the ignition is switched on,

this warning lamp comes on in the
seat belt warning display screen or
on the instrument panel. It stays on
while the airbag is deactivated.
102
Safety
To ensure the safety of your child,

the passenger's front airbag must be
deactivated when you install a rearward
facing child seat on the front passenger
seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Reactivating the
passenger's front airbag
5
When you remove a rearward facing child
seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to
the ON position to reactivate the airbag and so
ensure the safety of a front seat passenger in
the event of an accident.
When the ignition is switched on,

this warning lamp comes on in the
seat belt warning lamps display
screen or in the instrument panel for
approximately one minute to signal
that the front airbag is activated.
103
Safety
AR
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това може да причини
BG
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
CS
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT
DA
KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung,
DE
das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
EL
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
EN
CHILD can occur
NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un
ES
AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja
ET
avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
FI
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
FR
frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT.
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
HR
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a
HU
gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
IT
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
LT
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
104
Safety
NEKAD NEuzstādiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera sēdvietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS GAISA
LV
SPILVENS. Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
NL
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
NO
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji "tyłem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
PL POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM. Może to doprowadzić do ŚMIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodować u niego POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA.
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
PT
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
RU
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем. Это может привести к
5
ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
NIKDY neinštalujte detské zádržné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM čelným AIRBAGOM.
SK
Mohlo by dôjsť k SMRTEĽNÉMU alebo VÁŽNEMU PORANENIU DIEŤAŤA.
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
SL
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu
SR
nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att
SV
DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT.
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
TR
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
105
Safety
Child seats recommended Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

by CITROËN
CITROËN offers a range of recommended child

seats which are secured using a three point
seat belt.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX XP"
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearward facing position.
L6
"GRACO Booster"
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
106
Safety
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
(a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age
9-18 kg 15-25 kg 22-36 kg

Under 13 kg
Passenger's (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
Seat (groups 0 (b) and 0+)
front airbag From 1 to about From 3 to about From 6 to about
Up to about 1 year old
3 years old 6 years old 10 years old
Deactivated,
U U U U
5
"OFF"
Row 1 (c) Passenger seat
Activated "ON" X UF UF UF
Seat behind the

U U U U
driver's seat
Row 2 (d)
Seat behind the
passenger's U U U U
seat
Centre rear
U U U U
seat (e)
107
Safety
U: seat suitable for the installation of a

Remove and stow the head restraint
child seat secured using the seat belt
before installing a child seat with backrest
and universally approved for "rearward
on a passenger seat.
facing" and/or "forward facing" use.
Refit the head restraint once the child seat
UF: seat suitable for the installation of a child
has been removed.
seat secured using the seat belt and
universally approved for "forward facing"
use.
X: seat not suitable for the installation of a
child seat of the weight group indicated.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which

can be installed in all vehicles using the
seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots
and "car cots" cannot be installed on the
front passenger seat.
(c) Refer to the legislation in force in your
country before carrying your child in this
seating position.
(d) To install a child seat at the rear,
rearward or forward facing, move the
front seat forward, then adjust the
backrest to an upright position to allow
enough room for the child seat and the
child's legs.
(e) A child seat with a support leg must
never be installed on this seat.
108
Safety
F fix the hook of the top tether to ring B,

"ISOFIX" mountings F tighten the top tether.
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance
with the latest ISOFIX regulations.
The seats, shown below, are fitted with ISOFIX
compliant mountings: When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the
left-hand rear position of the bench seat,
before fitting the seat, first move the
centre rear seat belt towards the middle
of the vehicle, so as to avoid interference
- a ring B, behind the seat, indicated by a with the operation of the seat belt.
marking, for securing the top tether.
5
This arrangement reduces forward tipping of
The incorrect installation of a child seat
the child seat in the event of a front impact.
in a vehicle compromises the child's
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
protection in the event of an accident.
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
Strictly follow the fitting instructions
vehicle.
provided in the user guide supplied with
ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches
the child seat.
which are secured on the two rings A.
Some seats also have a top tether which is
* Depending on version.
attached to ring B.
There are three rings for each seat: For information on the possibilities for
installing ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
To secure the child seat at the TOP TETHER:
F remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat in this position (refit
it once the child seat has been removed),
F pass the tether of the child seat over the
seat back, centring it between the openings
- two rings A, located between the vehicle's
for the head restraint rods,
seat backrest and cushion, indicated by a
marking,
109
Safety
ISOFIX child seats "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX

"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
recommended by base"
(size category: B1)
(size category: E)
CITROËN
CITROËN offers a range of ISOFIX child seats Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18kg
listed and type approved for your vehicle.
Also consult the installation notes of the

child seat’s manufacturer to find out how
to install and remove the seat.
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX Installed only in the forward facing position.
base which is attached to the rings A. Is attached to rings A and upper ring B,
The base has a height-adjustable support referred to as TOP TETHER, using a top
leg, which rests on the vehicle's floor. tether.
This child seat can also be secured with a Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used lying down.
and must be attached to the vehicle seat This child seat can also be used on seats
using the three-point seat belt. not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this
case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat
by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front
seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do
not touch the backrest.
110
Safety
Summary table of locations for ISOFIX child seats

In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Under 10 kg
Under 10 kg
(group 0) 9-18 kg
(group 0)
Under 13 kg (group 1)
Up to about
(group 0+) From about 1 to 3 years old
6 months
Up to about 1 year
5
Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot Rearward facing Rearward facing Forward facing
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1

Passenger's
Seat
front airbag
ISOFIX Deactivated, "OFF" X IL IL IUF / IL
passenger
seat* Activated "ON" X X X IUF / IL
Row 1 (a)
Non-ISOFIX Deactivated, "OFF" Not ISOFIX
passenger
seat* Activated "ON" Not ISOFIX
Seat behind
the driver's X(1) IL(3) IL IL(3) IL IUF / IL
seat
Row 2 Seat behind the

X(1) IL(2) IL IL(2) IL IUF / IL
passenger's seat
Centre rear
Not ISOFIX
seat
111
Safety
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your

country before installing a child at this
before installing a child seat with a
seating position.
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an head restraint once the child seat has
Isofix Universal seat, "Forward facing", been removed.
secured using the top tether.
IL: seat suitable for the installation of an
Isofix Semi-Universal seat which is
either:
- "rearward facing" fitted with an
upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with a
support leg,
- a cot fitted with a top tether or a
support leg.
For securing the top tether using
the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the
associated section.
X: seat is not suitable for the installation
of an ISOFIX seat or cot of the weight
group indicated.
(1): The installation of a cot on this seat

may prevent the use of one or more of
the other seats in this row.
(2): adjust the front seat to the furthest
forward position.
(3): adjust the front seat to the maximum
height.
112
Safety
Summary table of locations for i-Size child seats

The i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A.
These i-Size child seats also have:
- either a top tether that is attached to ring B,
- or a support leg resting on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat,
which prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on ISOFIX mountings, refer to the associated section.
Seat Passenger's front airbag i-Size restraint system
Deactivated, "OFF" i-U

ISOFIX passenger seat*
Activated "ON" i-UF
Row 1 (a)
5
Non-ISOFIX passenger Deactivated, "OFF" Not i-Size
seat* Activated "ON" Not i-Size
Seat behind the driver's seat i-U
Row 2
Seat behind the passenger's
i-U
seat
Centre rear seat Not i-Size
113
Safety
i-U: suitable for i-Size restraint systems in

the "Universal" category, forward facing
and rearward facing.
i-UF: only suitable for i-Size restraint systems
in the "Universal" category, forward
facing.
X: seat is not suitable for i-Size restraint
systems in the "Universal" category.
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your

country before installing a child at this
seating position.

before installing a child seat with backrest
on a passenger seat.
Refit the head restraint once the child seat
has been removed.
114
Safety
Advice
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a The head restraint must be removed before CITROËN recommends using a booster seat
vehicle compromises the child's protection in installing a child seat with a backrest on a with a backrest, equipped with a belt guide at
the event of an accident. passenger seat. shoulder level.
Check that there is no seat belt or seat belt Ensure that the head restraint is stored or As a safety precaution, do not leave:
buckle under the child seat as this could attached securely to prevent it from being - a child or children alone and unattended in
make it unstable. thrown around the vehicle in the event of a vehicle,
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once - a child or an animal in a vehicle under the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack the child seat has been removed. sun, with the windows closed,
relative to the child's body to a minimum, - the keys within the reach of children inside
even for short journeys. the vehicle.
Children in front
When installing a child seat using the seat To prevent accidental opening of the doors
The legislation on carrying children on the
5
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened and rear windows, use the child lock.
front passenger seat is specific to each
correctly on the child seat and that it secures Take care not to open the rear windows by
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
the child seat firmly on the seat of your more than one third.
your country.
vehicle. If your passenger seat is adjustable, To protect young children from the rays of the
Deactivate the passenger's front airbag when
move it forwards if necessary. sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
a rearward facing child seat is installed on the
At rear seating positions, always leave
front passenger seat.
sufficient space between the front seat and:
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
- a rearward facing child seat,
injured or killed if the air bag is deployed.
- the feet of a child seated in a "forward
facing" child seat.
For this, move the seat forward and, if Installing a booster seat
necessary, straighten its backrest too. The chest part of the seat belt must be
For optimal installation of the "forward facing" positioned on the child's shoulder without
child seat, verify that its backrest is as close touching the neck.
as possible to the backrest of the vehicle Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
seat, if possible in contact with it. passes correctly over the child's thighs.
115
Safety
Mechanical child lock Unlocking Electric child lock

F Using the ignition key or the integral key,
depending on version, turn the red control
as far as it will go:
- to the left on the left-hand rear door,
Mechanical system to prevent opening of a rear - to the right on the right-hand rear door. Remote control system to prevent opening of
door using its interior control. the rear doors using their interior controls.
The control, red in colour, is located on the
edge of each rear door.
It is identified by a mark on the bodywork. Do not confuse the child lock control,
which is red, with the back-up locking Activation
control, which is black.
Locking
F With the ignition on, press this button.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompanied by a message confirming
activation.
This indicator lamp remains on all the time that
the child lock is activated
It is still possible to open the doors from the
F Using the ignition key or the integral key,
outside.
depending on version, turn the red control
as far as it will go:
- to the right on the left-hand rear door,
- to the left on the right-hand rear door.
116
Safety
Deactivation
F With the ignition on, press this button again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off,
accompanied by a message to confirm
deactivation.
This indicator lamp remains off while the child
lock is switched off.
Any other state of the indicator lamp

indicates a fault with the electric child
locks.
Have them checked by CITROËN dealer
5
or a qualified workshop.
This system is independent and in no

circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition when
leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
117
Driving
Driving recommendations Important!

Observe the driving regulations and remain
Never drive with the parking brake
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
applied – Risk of overheating and damage
Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your
to the braking system!
hands on the wheel so that you are ready to
As the exhaust system of your vehicle
react at any time to any eventuality.
is very hot, even several minutes after
As a safety measure, the driver should only
switching off the engine, never park or run
carry out any operations that require close
the engine on inflammable surfaces (dry
attention when the vehicle is stationary. If you are obliged to drive through water:
grass, fallen leaves, etc.): Risk of fire!
On a long journey, a break every two hours is - check that the depth of water does not
strongly recommended. exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate might be generated by other users,
the need to brake and increase the distance - deactivate the Stop & Start system,
from other vehicles. - drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
Under no circumstances exceed 6 mph
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with
(10 km/h),
the engine running. If you have to leave
- do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
your vehicle with the engine running, apply
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as
Never leave the engine running in the parking brake and put the gearbox into
circumstances allow, make several light brake
an enclosed area without adequate neutral or position N or P, depending on
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
ventilation: internal combustion engines the type of gearbox.
If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon
monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and
workshop.
death!
In very severe wintry conditions Driving on flooded roads
(temperatures below -23°C), to guarantee We strongly advise against driving on flooded
correct operation and the longevity of roads, as this could cause serious damage
the mechanical elements of your vehicle, to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the
engine and gearbox, the engine must be electrical systems of your vehicle.
left running for 4 minutes before driving.
118
Driving
In case of towing Cooling Tyres

Towing a trailer on a slope increases the F Check the tyre pressures of the towing
Driving with a tow places greater demands temperature of the coolant. vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
on the towing vehicle and requires extra As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling recommended pressures.
care from the driver. capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
F To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed. Lighting
The maximum towable load on an incline
Distribution of loads F Check the electrical lighting and signalling
depends on the gradient and the exterior
on the trailer and the headlamp beam height
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the temperature.
of your vehicle.
heaviest items are as close as possible to In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
the axle and the nose weight approaches temperature.
the maximum permitted without exceeding
For more information on Adjusting the
it.
F If this warning lamp and the headlamp beam height, refer to the
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
STOP warning lamp come on, corresponding section.
reducing engine performance. The maximum
stop the vehicle and switch off
6
towed load must be reduced by 10% for every
1,000 metres of altitude. the engine as soon as possible.
The rear parking sensors will be
New vehicle deactivated automatically to avoid the
Do not pull a trailer before having driven at audible signal if a genuine CITROËN
Please respect the maximum towable
least 600 miles (1,000 kilometres). towbar is used.
weights.
Side wind Braking If the ambient temperature is high, it is

recommended that the engine be allowed
F Take into account the increased sensitivity Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
to wind. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
engine braking is recommended.
119
Driving
Anti-theft protection Starting / Switching off Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key
Electronic immobiliser the engine with the key or the remote control, which would weigh
down on its blade in the ignition switch
The keys contain an electronic chip which has Key starter and could cause a malfunction.
a secret code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible. Switching off the engine leads to a loss of
A few seconds after switching off the ignition, braking assistance.
this system locks the engine control system,
therefore preventing the engine from being
started in the event of a break-in. Starting the engine
If the system fails, as reported by a message,
the engine will not start. Parking brake applied:
Contact the CITROËN dealer. It has 3 positions: F With a manual gearbox in neutral, fully
- position 1 (Stop): inserting and removing depress the clutch pedal.
the key, steering column locked, F With an automatic gearbox, in mode N or P,
- position 2 (Ignition on): steering column fully depress the brake pedal.
unlocked, ignition on, diesel preheating, F Insert the key into the ignition switch; the
For safety and theft protection reasons,
engine running, system recognises the code.
do not leave your electronic key in the
- position 3 (Starting). F Unlock the steering column by
vehicle, even when you are close to it.
simultaneously turning the steering and the
It is recommended that you keep it with
key.
you.
Ignition on position
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or portable devices to be charged. In certain cases, you may have to apply
Once the state of charge of the battery drops significant force to move the steering
to the reserve level, the system switches to wheel (wheels on full lock, for example).
energy economy mode: the power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
120
Driving
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter

In temperate conditions, do not leave To facilitate unlocking of the steering
motor by turning the key to position
the engine at idle to warm up but move column, it is recommended that the
3 without pressing the accelerator pedal,
off straight away and drive at moderate wheels be returned to the straight ahead
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
speed. position before switching off the engine.
running, release the key.
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to
position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine F Check that the parking brake is correctly
Never leave the engine running in
pre-heating system. applied, particularly on sloping ground.
an enclosed area without adequate
ventilation: internal combustion engines
emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon
Wait until this warning lamp goes off in
monoxide. There is a risk of poisoning and Never switch off the ignition before the
the instrument panel then operate the
death! vehicle is at a complete stop. With the
starter motor by turning the key to position
In very extreme wintry conditions engine off, the braking and steering
3 without pressing the accelerator pedal,
(temperature below -23°C), to guarantee assistance systems are also cut off: risk of
until the engine starts. Once the engine is
correct operation and the longevity of loss of control of the vehicle.
running, release the key.
the mechanical elements of your vehicle,
engine and gearbox, the engine must be
6
In wintry conditions, the warning lamp left running for 4 minutes before starting
can stay on for a longer period. When the the vehicle. When you leave the vehicle, keep the key
engine is hot, the warning lamp does not with you and lock the vehicle.
come on.
If the engine does not start straight away,

Switching off the engine Energy economy mode
switch off the ignition. Wait a few moments F Stop the vehicle. After switching off the engine (position 1-Stop),
before operating the starter motor again. F With the engine running in idle, turn the key for a maximum of 30 minutes you can still use
If the engine does not start after several to position 1. functions such as the audio and telematic
attempts, do not keep trying: you risk F Remove the key from the ignition switch. system, the wipers, dipped beam headlamps,
damaging the starter motor or the engine. F To lock the steering column, turn the courtesy lamps, etc.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified steering wheel until it locks.
workshop.
121
Driving
The steering column unlocks and the engine

For more information on Energy Starting / Switching off starts.
economy mode, refer to the
the engine with Keyless For diesel engines, when the temperature
Entry and Starting is below zero and/or the engine is cold, the
engine will only start once the preheater
Starting the engine warning lamp is off.
Key left in If this warning lamp comes on after

If the key has been left in the ignition pressing the "START/STOP" button:
switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the
ignition will be switched off automatically F With a manual gearbox, you should keep
after one hour. the clutch pedal pressed down fully until
To switch the ignition back on, turn the key the warning lamp goes off and not press
to position 1 (Stop), then back to the "START/STOP" button again until the
position 2 (Ignition on). engine is fully running.
or
F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
into neutral. F With an automatic gearbox, you should
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, keep the brake pedal pressed down fully
press the clutch pedal down fully. until the warning lamp goes off and not
or press the "START/STOP" button again until
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear the engine is fully running.
selector in P or N mode.
F With the electronic key inside the vehicle,
press the brake pedal down fully.
F Briefly press the "START/

STOP" button while maintaining
pressure on the pedal until the
engine starts.
122
Driving
The presence of the K eyless Entry and Switching off the engine Switching the ignition on
Starting electronic key in the recognition
F Immobilise the vehicle, engine at idle.
(without starting)
zone is essential.
F With a manual gearbox, put the gear lever
If the electronic key is not detected in this
into neutral.
zone, a message is displayed.
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
Move the electronic key into this zone so
selector in P or N mode.
that the engine can be started.
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key
F With the electronic key inside
not detected – Back-up starting" section.
the vehicle, press the "START/
STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering column

locks.
With the Keyless Entry and Starting remote
If one of the starting conditions is not met, control inside the vehicle, pressing the "START/
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the STOP" button, with no action on the pedals,
a reminder message is displayed on the engine will not stop. allows the ignition to be switched on.
6
instrument panel.
In some circumstances, you will need to This also allows the accessories to be used (for
turn the steering wheel while pressing the example: audio system, lighting, etc.).
Never leave your vehicle with the
"START/STOP" button to assist unlocking electronic key still inside.
of the steering column. A message will
F Press the "START/STOP"
notify you if this is necessary.
button, the instrument panel
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of comes on but the engine does
braking assistance. not start.
As a safety measure, never leave the
vehicle while the engine is running. F Press the button again to switch off the
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.
With the ignition on, the system

automatically goes into energy economy
mode to maintain an adequate state of
charge in the battery.
123
Driving
Key not detected Back-up switch off Emergency switch-off

Emergency starting
There is an emergency reader on the steering
column to allow the engine start, when the
In the event of an emergency only, the engine
system doesn't detect the key in the recognition
can be switched off without conditions (even
zone, or when the battery of the electronic key
when driving).
is used.
Press the "START/STOP" button for about five
seconds.
In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.
When the electronic key is not detected or is

no longer in the recognition zone, a message
appears in the instrument panel when closing a
door or trying to switch off the engine.
F Place and hold the remote control against F To confirm the instruction to switch off the
the reader. engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
about five seconds.
F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
the gear lever in neutral then fully depress contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
the clutch pedal. workshop.
F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox,
select position P then press the brake pedal
firmly.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.

The engine starts.
124
Driving
When the vehicle is being driven, if this

Parking brake warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp
5-speed manual gearbox
Locking come on, accompanied by an audible Engaging reverse gear
signal and a message on the screen, this
indicates that the parking brake is still on
or has not been fully released.
Never leave a child alone inside the

vehicle with the ignition on, as they could
release the parking brake.
When towing, parking on a steep slope,

F Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise
or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn
your vehicle.
the wheels towards the kerb and engage
a gear (manual gearbox) or move the F Press the clutch pedal fully down.
selector lever to position P (automatic F Move the gear lever fully to the right then
Unlocking
6
gearbox). pull it back.
For towing, you vehicle is approved for
parking on slopes of up to 12%. Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle
is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate

starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
F Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,
press the release button then lower the
lever fully.
125
Driving
Automatic gearbox (EAT6) Gear selector positions Displays on the instrument panel
Six-speed automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Two driving modes are available:
- automatic operation with electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox,
with a sport programme for a more dynamic
driving style and a snow programme to
make driving easier when grip is poor. P. Parking.
- manual operation for sequential changing - The vehicle is stationary, parking brake on
of the gears by the driver. When you move the selector to select a
or off.
position, the corresponding indicator is
- Starting the engine.
displayed in the instrument panel.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary, P. Parking.
engine at idle. R. Reverse.
N. Neutral. N. Neutral.
- The vehicle is stationary, parking brake on.
D. Drive (automatic driving).
- Starting the engine.
S. Sport programme.
D. Automatic operation.
M + / -. Manual operation with sequential T. Snow programme.
changing of the six gears. 1 2 3 4 5 6. Gears engaged during manual
F Push backwards to shift up a gear. operation.
or -. Invalid value in manual mode.
F Push forwards to shift down a gear.
1. Gear selector.
Foot on brake
2. "S" (sport) button.
3. "T" (snow) button. F Press the brake pedal when this
4. Gear selector positions graphic. indicator lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel
(e.g. starting the engine).
126
Driving
Starting the vehicle If you release the accelerator sharply, the

When the engine is running at idle, with
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
the brakes released, if position R, D or
F Apply the parking brake. safety reasons.
M is selected, the vehicle moves even
F Select position P or N.
without the accelerator being pressed.
F Start the engine.
Do not leave children unsupervised inside
If these conditions are not met, there is an
the vehicle when the engine is running. Never select position N while the vehicle
audible signal, accompanied by the display of a
When carrying out maintenance with the is moving.
warning message.
engine running, apply the parking brake Never select position P or R unless the
F With the engine running, press the brake
and select position P. vehicle is completely stationary.
pedal.
F Release the parking brake.
F Select position R, D or M.
F Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
Sport and snow programmes
These two special programmes supplement the
automatic operation in very specific conditions
If position N is selected inadvertently while
6
F Select position D for automatic changing of of use.
driving, allow the engine to return to idle, the six gears.
then select position D to accelerate. The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
If the temperature is below -23°C, the mode, without any action needed from the Sport programme "S"
engine should be left at idle for four driver. It continuously selects the most suitable F Press button S, after starting the engine.
minutes, to ensure the correct operation gear according to the style of driving, the profile The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
and life of the engine and gearbox. of the road and the load in the vehicle. style of driving.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the selector, press the accelerator pedal down
fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down S appears in the instrument panel.
automatically or maintains the gear selected
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide efficient engine
braking.
127
Driving
Snow programme "T" It is only possible to change from one gear to Stopping the vehicle
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed
F Press button "T", after starting the engine. permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate Before switching off the engine, you can engage
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery temporarily in automatic mode. position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral.
roads. In both cases, apply the parking brake to
This programme improves starting and immobilise the vehicle.
handling when traction is poor. D disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succession in
the instrument panel. If the selector is not in position P, when the
driver's door is opened or approximately
T appears in the instrument panel. 45 seconds after the ignition is switched
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then off, a warning message appears in the
the actual gear engaged is displayed. screen.
It is possible to change from position D F Return the selector to position P; the
(automatic) to position M (manual) at any time. message disappears.
Return to standard When the vehicle is stationary or moving When driving on flooded roads or when
automatic operation very slowly, the gearbox engages first gear crossing a ford, proceed at walking pace.
automatically.
F At any time, press the selected button again
The sport and snow programmes are inactive
to quit the programme engaged and return
in manual operation.
to auto-adaptive mode. Operating fault
When the ignition is on, the lighting

Manual operation of this warning lamp, associated with
Invalid value during manual an audible signal and a message
F Select position M for sequential changing operation on the screen, indicates a gearbox
of the six gears.
This symbol is displayed if a gear fault.
F Move the selector towards the + sign to
change up a gear. is not engaged correctly (selector
F Move the selector towards the – sign to between two positions). In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
change down a gear. mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a
substantial knock when changing from P to R
and from N to R.This will not cause any damage
to the gearbox.
128
Driving
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed Example:

restrictions permitting.
Gear shift indicator - You are in third gear.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified - You press the accelerator pedal.
workshop as soon as possible. - The system may suggest that you engage a
(Depending on engine.)
higher gear.
This system reduces fuel consumption by
There is a risk of damage to the gearbox: recommending the most appropriate gear.
- if you press the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time, Depending on the driving situation and the
- if you force the movement of the equipment of your vehicle, the system can
selector from the P position to another recommend you to skip one (or several)
position when the battery is flat. gear(s). You can follow this instruction without
To reduce fuel consumption when at engaging the intermediate gears.
a prolonged standstill with the engine Gear engagement recommendations are
running (traffic jam, etc.), put the selector only optional. In fact, the configuration of the
in the N position and apply the parking road, the traffic density and safety remain
brake. determining factors when choosing the best
The information appears on the instrument
6
gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible
panel in the form of an arrow.
for deciding whether or not to follow the
system’s advice.
The system adapts its gear change
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, This function cannot be deactivated.
recommendation according to the driving
do not try to start the engine by pushing
conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the
the vehicle.
driver’s requirements (power, acceleration,
braking, etc.).
With an automatic gearbox, the system is The system never suggests:
only active in manual mode. - engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear,
On some BlueHDi Diesel versions with manual - engaging a lower gear.
gearbox, in certain driving conditions the
system may suggest changing into neutral so
that the engine can go into standby (STOP On vehicles fitted with a manual gearbox,
mode with Stop & Start). In this case, N is the arrow may be accompanied by the
displayed on the instrument panel. gear recommended.
129
Driving
Hill start assist Operating fault

This system keeps your vehicle briefly
stationary (for approximately 2 seconds) when
making a hill start, while you transfer your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
It is only active when: If a fault in the system occurs, this warning
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with lamp comes on accompanied by a message.
your foot on the brake pedal, Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
- certain slope conditions are met, workshop to have the system checked.
- with the driver’s door closed. Uphill, with the vehicle stationary, it will
briefly stop the vehicle from rolling back
when you release the brake pedal.
With a manual gearbox, if you are in first gear
or in neutral.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being With an automatic gearbox, if you are in D or M.
held temporarily by hill start assist.
If you need to leave the vehicle with the
engine running, apply the parking brake
manually then ensure that the parking
brake warning lamp lights up constantly on
the instrument panel.
The hill start assist function cannot be

deactivated. However, use of the parking
brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts
its function.
Downhill, with the vehicle stationary and
reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
for a short time when you release the brake
pedal.
130
Driving
With an automatic gearbox, Special cases: STOP mode not

Stop & Start vehicle stationary, this warning lamp available
The Stop & Start system puts the engine comes on in the instrument panel
temporarily into standby – STOP mode – during and the engine goes into standby STOP mode is not invoked when:
stops in traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc.). The automatically when you press - the vehicle is on a steep slope (up or down),
engine restarts automatically – START mode – the brake pedal or place the gear - the driver's door is open,
as soon as you want to move off. selector in position N. - the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
The restart takes place instantly, quickly and - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
silently. (10 km/h) since the last engine start,
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system Time counter in Stop & Start - the engine is needed to maintain a
reduces fuel consumption and exhaust (minutes / seconds or hours / comfortable temperature in the passenger
emissions as well as the noise level when minutes) compartment,
stationary. - demisting is active,
A time counter calculates the time spent in - some temporary conditions (battery charge,
STOP mode during a journey. engine temperature, braking assistance,
It resets to zero every time the ignition is ambient temperature, etc.) where it is
Going into engine STOP switched on. necessary to ensure control of the system.
6
mode
With a manual gearbox, vehicle For your comfort, during parking
In this case, this indicator lamp
stationary, this warning lamp manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available
flashes for a few seconds then goes
comes on in the instrument panel for a few seconds after coming out of
off.
and the engine goes into standby reverse gear.
automatically when you place the The Stop & Start does not affect the
operation of vehicle systems such as This operation is perfectly normal.
gear lever in neutral and you release
the clutch pedal. braking, power steering, etc.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP

mode; you must switch off the ignition.
131
Driving
Going into engine START - some temporary conditions (battery charge, With the button on the
engine temperature, braking assistance, dashboard
mode adjustment of the air conditioning, etc.)
where it is needed for control of a system or
With a manual gearbox, this
of the vehicle.
warning lamp goes off in the
instrument panel and the engine
In this case, this indicator lamp
restarts automatically when you
flashes for a few seconds then
fully depress the clutch pedal.
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.

With an automatic gearbox, this F Press this button.
warning lamp goes off and the Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination of
engine restarts automatically when: the button’s indicator lamp and the display of a
Deactivation/Reactivation message.
In certain circumstances (e.g. the need to Pressing this button again reactivates the
- you release the brake pedal with the gear
maintain the temperature in the passenger function.
selector in position D or M,
compartment), it may be useful to deactivate The indicator lamp goes off and a message is
- you are in position N with the brake pedal
the Stop & Start system. displayed.
released and you move the gear selector to
position D or M, The system can be deactivated at any time,
- you engage reverse. once the ignition is switched on.
Opening the bonnet
If the engine is in STOP mode, it then restarts.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
The Stop & Start system is reactivated
Special case: START goes off automatically every time the ignition is
deactivate the Stop & Start system to
automatically switched on.
avoid any risk of injury resulting from an
automatic change to START mode.
As a safety measure or to maintain comfort
levels in the vehicle, START mode is invoked
automatically when:
- you open the driver's door,
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 2 mph
(3 km/h),
132
Driving
Driving on flooded roads The Stop & Start system requires a Recognition of speed limit
Before driving in a flooded area, it is 12 V battery of specific technology and and advice signs
strongly recommended that you deactivate specification.
the Stop & Start system. All work on this type of battery must be This system allows the speed limit detected by
For more information on Driving advice, carried out only by a CITROËN dealer or a the camera to be displayed in the instrument
particularly on flooded roads, refer to the qualified workshop. panel.
corresponding section. For more information on the 12 V battery, Specific speed limits, such as those for heavy
refer to the associated section. goods vehicles, are not displayed.
The display of the speed limit in the instrument
panel is updated as you pass a speed limit sign
Malfunction intended for cars (light vehicles).
In the event of a fault with the system, the

button’s indicator lamp flashes for a few
moments, then remains on.
qualified workshop. The units for the speed limits (mph or
6
km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in.
If a fault occurs in STOP mode, the engine may It should be taken into account so that you
stall. observe the speed limit.
All of the instrument panel warning lamps come For the system to operate correctly when
on. you change country, the units for speed in
You must switch off the ignition and start the the instrument panel must be those for the
engine again. country you are driving in.
133
Driving
The automatic reading of road signs is a Principles Display on the instrument panel
driving assistance system and does not
always display speed limits correctly.
The speed limit signs present on the road
always take priority over the display by the
system.
The system cannot in any circumstances
replace the need for vigilance on the part
of the driver.
The driver must observe the driving
regulations and must adapt the speed of
the vehicle to suit the weather and traffic.
It is possible for the system to not display The system is activated: "MAX" is displayed in
the speed limit if it does not detect a the instrument panel.
Using a camera at the top of the windscreen,
speed limit sign within a preset period. The information associated with speed limit
this system detects and reads speed limit and
The system is designed to detect signs recognition is displayed after the trip computer
end of speed limit signs.
that conform to the Vienna Convention on data.
The system also takes account of information
road signs.
on speed limits from the navigation system
mapping. To display it:
To maintain correct operation of the Activation/Deactivation

system: regularly clean the area in front of
the camera. The system is activated or deactivated via the F Press this button, located at the edge of the
vehicle configuration menu. wiper control stalk.
F Press the knob on the steering wheel.
134
Driving
- driving with a space-saver type spare wheel

or snow chains fitted,
- puncture repair using the temporary repair
kit,
- young drivers, etc.
The following situations may interfere with the

operation of the system or prevent it working:
- poor visibility (inadequate street lighting,
falling snow, rain, fog),
The system is active but is not detecting speed The driver can adjust the vehicle’s speed
- windscreen area located in front of the
limit information. according to the information given by the
camera dirty, misted, frost-covered, snow-
system.
covered, damaged or covered by a sticker,
A message is displayed and "MEM" flashes in
- fault with the camera,
the display: speed limiter or cruise control
- obsolete or incorrect mapping,
active, the system suggests a speed setting.
- hidden road signs (other vehicles,
vegetation, snow),
6
You should update your navigation - speed limit signs that do not conform to the
mapping regularly in order to receive standard, are damaged or distorted.
accurate speed limit information from the
system.
On detection of speed limit information,

the system displays the value detected,
accompanied by a message.
Operating limits
The legislation on speed limits is specific to
each country.
The system does not take account of reduced
speed limits in the following cases:
- poor weather (rain, snow),
- atmospheric pollution,
- trailer, caravan,
135
Driving
Memorising the speed Display on the instrument panel

setting
This memorisation is in addition to the display
of Speed limit recognition.
The driver can choose to adapt the speed On detection of a speed limit sign, the system
setting to the speed limit suggested, by displays the speed limit and a message offering
pressing the memorisation button for the speed to make it a new speed setting.
limiter and the cruise control. "MEM" flashes in the screen for a few seconds
This speed setting then replaces the previous on the display.
speed setting for the speed limiter and/or cruise
3. Speed limit indication.
control.
4. Memorise the speed.
5. Current speed of the vehicle. If there is a difference of less than 6 mph
For more information on the Speed 6. Current speed setting. (10 km/h) between the speed setting and
limiter, Cruise control, refer to the the speed displayed by the recognition
corresponding sections. system, the MEM symbol is not displayed.
Memorising the speed
Steering mounted controls

F Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
Speed limiter/cruise control information is
displayed.
1. Select speed limiter/cruise control mode.

2. Memorise a speed setting.
136
Driving
Speed limiter Steering mounted controls

System which prevents the
vehicle from exceeding the speed
programmed by the driver.
The speed limiter is switched on manually.

The minimum programmed speed is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
F Make an initial press on this The programmed speed remains in the system
button to request saving of the memory when the ignition is switched off.
speed suggested.
1. Selecting speed limiter mode.

A message asks you to confirm the request The speed limiter is a driving aid that
with a second press. 2. Decreasing the programmed value.
cannot, in any circumstances, replace the
3. Increasing the programmed value.
need to observe speed limits or the need
4. Speed limiter On / Pause.
6
for vigilance on the part of the driver.
5. Use the speed suggested by the speed
limit recognition system.
For more information on Speed limit

recognition, refer to the corresponding
section.
F Press this button again to

confirm and save the new speed
setting.
After a predetermined period, the screen

returns to the standard display.
137
Driving
Displays on the instrument panel F make a first press on button 5; a message

is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
F press button 5 again to save the suggested
speed.
F If the speed setting is suitable (last speed The speed is then displayed in the instrument
setting programmed in the system), press panel as the new speed setting.
button 4 to switch the speed limiter on.
Temporarily exceeding the

speed setting
6. Speed limiter on / off indicator. F If you want to temporarily exceed the
7. Speed limiter mode selected. programmed speed limit, press firmly on
F Pressing button 4 again temporarily the accelerator pedal, beyond the point of
8. Programmed speed setting value.
interrupts the function (pause). resistance.
9. Speed suggested by the speed limit
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily
recognition system.
and the displayed programmed speed flashes.
Adjusting the speed setting
Switching on To modify the speed setting:

F in increments of + or - 1 mph (km/h), briefly
press button 2 or 3 repeatedly,
F continuously, in increments of +/- 3 mph
(km/h), press and hold button 2 or 3. On a steep downhill incline or in the event
of sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
To modify the speed limiter setting using the
will not keep the vehicle below the set
speed suggested by the speed limit recognition
speed limit.
system:
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to the LIMIT position
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
to select the speed limiter; the function is
instrument panel,
paused.
138
Driving
When the speed limit is exceeded without

any action from the driver, an audible signal
The use of mats not approved by Cruise control
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
completes the alert. System which automatically
of the speed limiter.
Once the vehicle slows down to the required maintains the speed of the vehicle
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
setting, the speed limiter is active again: the at the value programmed by the
- ensure that the mat is positioned
speed setting is displayed continuously. driver, without any action on the
correctly,
accelerator pedal.
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
The cruise control is switched on

manually.
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of
25 mph (40 km/h) as well as:
- with a manual gearbox, the
engagement of third gear or higher,
Switching off - with an automatic gearbox, the
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to 0: the speed limiter engagement of the selector in mode D
information disappears. or of second gear or higher in mode M.
6
Cruise control remains active after
changing gear on vehicles fitted with a
manual gearbox and Stop & Start.
Malfunction
Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the speed

limiter.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a The operation of the cruise control can be
qualified workshop. interrupted (pause):
- by pressing control 4 or by pressing the
brake pedal,
- automatically, if operation of the dynamic
stability control system is triggered.
Switching off the ignition cancels any

programmed speed setting.
139
Driving
The cruise control system is a driving aid Displays on the instrument panel
that cannot, in any circumstances, replace
the need to observe speed limits, nor the
need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
As a safety measure, you are advised to F To enable the cruise control and set a cruise
keep your feet near the pedals at all times. speed, once the vehicle has reached the
desired speed, press button 2 or 3: the
current speed of your vehicle becomes the
cruise speed setting.
You can release the accelerator pedal.
6. Cruise control selection indication.

7. Cruise control pause / resume indication.
8. Programmed speed setting value.
9. Speed suggested by the speed limit
recognition system.
F Pressing button 4 interrupts operation of the
system (pause).
1. Selection of cruise control mode.
2. Set the current speed of the vehicle as the
cruise setting or lower the cruise setting.
3. Set the current speed of the vehicle as the Switching on
cruise setting or raise the cruise setting.
4. Pause / Resume cruise control.
F Pressing button 4 again restores operation
5. Use the speed suggested by the speed of the cruise control (ON).
limit recognition system.
F Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the CRUISE

For more information on Speed limit
position to select cruise control mode; the
recognition, refer to the corresponding
function is paused.
section.
140
Driving
Modifying the cruise speed F press button 5 again to save the suggested
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
speed.
setting The speed is then displayed in the instrument
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed speed.
The cruise control must be active. panel as the new speed setting.
As a precautionary measure, the selected

cruise speed setting should be close to Temporarily exceeding the You may have to brake to control the speed of
your vehicle. In this case, the cruise control is
your vehicle’s current speed, to avoid any programmed speed
automatically paused.
sudden acceleration or deceleration of the
If needed (for overtaking, etc.), it is possible to To activate the system again, with the speed
vehicle.
exceed the programmed speed by pressing the of the vehicle above 25 mph (40 km/h), press
accelerator pedal. button 4.
To modify the cruise speed setting from the The cruise control is temporarily overridden
current speed of the vehicle: and the programmed speed setting flashes.
F in steps of +/- 1 mph (km/h), make repeated
short presses on button 2 or 3, Switching off
F continuously, in increments of +/- 3 mph
F Turn thumbwheel 1 to 0: the cruise control
6
(5 km/h), press and hold button 2 or 3.
information disappears from the screen.
Take care: pressing and holding

button 2 or 3 results in a rapid change in
the speed of your vehicle.
Malfunction
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal. Flashing dashes indicate a fault with the cruise
Once the vehicle has returned to the control system.
To modify the cruise speed setting using the programmed speed, the cruise control takes Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
speed suggested by the speed limit recognition over again: the display of the programmed qualified workshop.
system: speed setting becomes steady again.
F the speed suggested is displayed in the
instrument panel,
F make a first press on button 5; a message
is displayed to confirm the memorisation
request,
141
Driving
Use the cruise control only when you Collision Risk Alert and
are able to travel at an even speed for a
certain period of time and at a suitable
Active Safety Brake
distance from other vehicles.
Do not activate the cruise control in urban
areas, in heavy traffic, on winding or steep
roads, on slippery or flooded roads, or in
conditions of poor visibility (heavy rain, This system is a driving aid and it includes
fog, falling snow, etc.). three functions.
In some circumstances, it may not be Collision Risk Alert: it warns the driver if their
possible to maintain or reach the cruise vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in
speed set: towing, vehicle heavily loaded, front or a pedestrian present in their traffic lane. The system is active from about 4 mph (7 km/h)
steep climb. Intelligent emergency braking assistance: and is deactivated below about 3 mph (5 km/h).
it completes the braking action taken by the It takes account of:
driver if this is inadequate. - registered vehicles running in the same
Active Safety Brake: it intervenes following direction or stationary,
the alert if the driver does not react quickly - pedestrians in the traffic lane (bicycles,
enough and does not operate the vehicle's motorcycles, animals and objects on the
brakes. road are not necessarily detected).
The use of mats not approved by
If the driver fails to act, it contributes
CITROËN may interfere with the operation
towards avoiding a collision or limiting
of the cruise control.
its severity by reducing the speed of your
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: This system is designed to assist the
vehicle.
- ensure that the mat is positioned driver and improve road safety.
correctly, It is the driver's responsibility to
- do not fit one mat on top of another. continuously monitor the state of the
Activation and operating traffic, observing the driving regulations.
This system does not avoid the need for
conditions vigilance on the part of the driver.
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of
the windscreen, and depending on the version,
a radar located in the front bumpers.
142
Driving
This level of alert is based on the time before

As soon as the system detects a potential It is possible that warnings are not given,
collision. It takes into account the vehicle
obstacle, it prepares the braking circuit in are given too late or seem unjustified.
dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the
case automatic braking is needed. This Consequently, always stay alert and be
one in front, the environmental conditions, the
may cause a slight noise and a sense of prepared to react at any time to avoid an
operating conditions of the vehicle (on a curve,
deceleration. accident.
pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the
relevant moment.
Operating limits Where the speed of your vehicle is too

high approaching another vehicle, the first
In the following cases, deactivating the Collision Risk Alert level of alert may not be displayed: the
system via the vehicle's configuration menu is
recommended: Depending on the degree of risk of collision level 2 alert may be displayed directly.
- when towing a trailer, detected by the system and the alert threshold Important: the level 1 alert is never
- when carrying long objects on roof bars or a chosen by the driver, different levels of alert can be displayed when the "Close" trigger
roof rack, triggered and displayed in the instrument panel. threshold has been selected.
- before using an automatic car wash, with
the engine running, Level 1: visual alert only, signalling
6
- before placing the vehicle on a rolling stand to you that the vehicle in front is very
in a workshop, close. Modifying the alert trigger
- when the vehicle is being towed, with the The message "Vehicle close" is threshold
engine running, displayed. This threshold determines how you wish to be
- when a "space-saver" type spare wheel is warned of the presence of a vehicle moving
fitted (depending on version), This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle or stationary in front of you, or a pedestrian
- following impact damage to the windscreen time between your vehicle and the vehicle in present in your traffic lane.
close to the detection camera, front. The current threshold can be modified via the
- if the brake lamps are not working. touch screen’s Vehicle / Driving menu.
Level 2: visual and audible alert, You can select one of three predefined
warning you that a collision is thresholds:
imminent. - "Distant",
The message "Brake!" is displayed. - "Normal",
- "Close".
The last threshold selected is kept in memory
when the ignition is switched off.
143
Driving
Intelligent emergency Using a radar and a camera, this function acts

If automatic emergency braking is not
on the vehicle's braking system.
braking assistance activated, you are alerted by the fixed
If the radar and the camera have confirmed display of this warning lamp accompanied
If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid
the presence of a vehicle or a pedestrian, by a message.
a collision, this system will supplement the
this warning lamp flashes once the function With an automatic gear box, in the event
braking, within the limits of the laws of physics.
is acting on the vehicle's brakes. of automatic emergency braking until the
This assistance will only be provided if you
vehicle comes to a complete stop, keep
press the brake pedal. Important: if operation of the the brake pedal pressed down to prevent
automatic emergency braking is the vehicle from starting off again.
triggered, you should take back
Active Safety Brake control of your vehicle and brake
with the pedal to add to or finish the Specific conditions for operation
automatic braking action.
The vehicle's speed must be between 3 mph
The driver can take back control of the vehicle and 53 mph (5 km/h and 85 km/h) when a
at any time by sharply turning the steering moving vehicle is detected.
wheel and/or pressing the accelerator pedal. The vehicle's speed must not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h) when a stopped vehicle is detected.
The vehicle's speed must not exceed 35 mph
(60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected.
The point at which braking is triggered
The ESC system must not be defective.
may be adjusted depending on the driving
The CDS must not be deactivated.
actions of the driver, such as movement
All passenger seatbelts must be fastened.
of the steering wheel or actions on the
Driving at a steady speed on roads with few
accelerator pedal.
bends is required.
Operation of the function may be felt by

slight vibration in the brake pedal. After an impact, the function automatically
This function, also called automatic emergency stops operating. Consult a CITROËN
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
braking, aims to reduce the speed of impact or dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
the automatic braking is maintained for
avoid a frontal collision by your vehicle where system checked.
1 to 2 seconds.
the driver fails to react.
144
Driving
Deactivation/Activation The camera may be disrupted or not work Fatigue detection system
in the following situations:
By default, the system is automatically It is recommended that you take a break as
- poor visibility (inadequate street
activated at every engine start. soon as you feel tired or at least every two
lighting, falling snow, heavy rain, dense
This system can be deactivated or activated via hours.
fog, etc.),
the touch screen’s Vehicle / Driving menu. Depending on version, the function either
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming
has the "Driving time warning" only, or this
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp
Deactivation of the system is combined with the "Fatigue detection system".
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating
signalled by the illumination of this
shade and light, etc.),
indicator lamp, accompanied by the
- obstruction of the camera (mud, frost,
display of a message.
snow, etc.). The system cannot in any circumstances
In these situations, detection performance replace the need for vigilance on the part
Malfunction may be reduced. of the driver.
Do not take the wheel if you are tired.
In the event of a fault with the

system, you are alerted by the
Activation / Deactivation
6
illumination of this warning lamp,
Clean the windscreen regularly,
accompanied by the display of a The system is activated or deactivated via the
particularly the area in front of the camera.
message and an audible signal. vehicle configuration menu.
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
For more information on the menu, refer to the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
Check that the sensor (camera) is not covered part covering your screen in the "Dashboard
conceal the detection camera.
by dirt, mud, frost, snow, etc. instruments" section.
If the fault persists, contact a CITROËN dealer
The state of the system stays in memory when
or a qualified workshop to have the system
the ignition is switched off.
checked.
145
Driving
Driving time warning As soon as the vehicle’s speed drops

below 40 mph (65 km/h), the system goes
into standby.
The system triggers an alert once it
Driving time monitoring resumes when the
detects that the driver has not taken
vehicle travels at above 40 mph (65 km/h).
a break after two hours of driving at
When the system interprets the behaviour of
a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
the vehicle as indicating a certain fatigue or
inattention threshold on the part of the driver, it
triggers the first level of alert.
Fatigue detection system The driver is then alerted by the message "Be
careful!", accompanied by an audible signal.
Depending on version, the "Driving time
warning" may be combined with the "Fatigue
After three first level alerts, the system triggers
detection system".
a new alert with the message "Take a break!",
This alert is issued via the display of a accompanied by a more pronounced audible
message encouraging you to take a break, signal.
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
In certain driving conditions (poor road
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
surface or strong winds), the system may
stopped.
give alerts independent of the driver's
The system resets itself if one of the following level of vigilance.
conditions is met:
- engine running, the vehicle has been
stationary for more than 15 minutes,
- the ignition has been switched off for a few
minutes, The system assesses the driver's
- the driver's seat belt is unfastened and their level of alertness by identifying
door is open. trajectory changes in relation to the
lane markings.
This system is particularly suited to fast roads

(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h))
146
Driving
The following situations may interfere with Lane Departure Warning Activation / Deactivation
the operation of the system or prevent it
working:
System
- poor visibility (inadequate lighting of System which uses a camera to recognise solid
the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain, or broken lines and detects the involuntary
dense fog, etc.), crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on
- dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming the road.
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp To provide safe driving, the camera analyses
road, leaving a tunnel, alternating the image then, if the driver's attention drops
shade and light, etc.), and the speed is higher than 35 mph (60 km/h),
This function can be activated and deactivated
- windscreen area located in front of the triggers a warning if there is an unexpected
via this button.
camera: dirty, misted up, frost-covered, change of direction.
The button’s indicator lamp indicates the status
snow-covered, damaged or covered by This system is particularly useful on motorways
of the function:
a sticker, and main roads.
- On: the function is activated.
- lane markings absent, worn, masked
- Off: the function is deactivated.
(snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks,
etc.), The status of the system remains in memory
6
- close to the vehicle ahead (lane when the ignition is switched off.
markings not detected),
- roads that are narrow, winding, etc.
Detection
This system is a driving aid that cannot, in If an unexpected change of direction
any circumstances, replace the need for is detected, you are alerted by
vigilance on the part of the driver. this warning lamp flashing in the
instrument panel and an audible
signal.
No warning is transmitted while the direction

indicator is active and for approximately
20 seconds after the direction indicator is
switched off.
147
Driving
- after a delay of about one second, when

Blind Spot Monitoring overtaking a vehicle slowly.
System
In the event of a fault, this warning This driving aid system is designed to
lamp flashes for approximately improve safety when driving and is in no
10 seconds then switches off. circumstances a substitute for the use
of the interior rear view mirror and door
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to
workshop. constantly check the traffic, to assess the
distances and relative speeds of other
vehicles and to predict their movements
Detection may be disrupted: before deciding whether to change lane.
- if the markings on the road are worn, This system is a driving aid that cannot, in
- if there is little contrast between the This system warns the driver of the presence of any circumstances, replace the need for
markings on the road and the road another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their vigilance on the part of the driver.
surface, vehicle (areas masked from the driver's field
- if the windscreen is dirty, of vision), as soon as this presents a potential
- in certain weather conditions: fog, danger.
heavy rain, snow, shade, bright
sunlight or direct exposure to the sun
(low sun, leaving a tunnel, etc.).
Activation and deactivation of the system is
done in the vehicle configuration menu.
This indicator lamp comes on in the

instrument panel.
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers

monitor the blind spots.
The status of the system remains in memory
when the ignition is switched off.
A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on
the side in question: To deactivate the system, go to the vehicle
- immediately, when being overtaken, configuration menu again.
The indicator lamp goes off.
148
Driving
The system is automatically deactivated

when towing with a towbar approved by
CITROËN.
Operation
The alert is given by a warning lamp that
comes on in the door mirror on the side in
question as soon as a vehicle – car, lorry, cycle
– is detected.
The following conditions must be met for this:
- all vehicles are moving in the same direction
and in adjacent lanes, No alert will be given in the following situations: - when overtaking or being overtaken by a
- the speed of your vehicle must be between - in the presence of non-moving objects very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) that is
7 and 85 mph (12 and 140 km/h), (parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, detected in the rear blind spot but is also
6
- you overtake a vehicle with a speed road signs, etc.), present in the driver’s front field of vision,
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h), - oncoming traffic, - when overtaking quickly,
- a vehicle overtakes you with a speed - driving on a winding road or a sharp corner, - in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
difference of less than 15 mph (25 km/h), front and behind are confused with a lorry or
- traffic is flowing normally, a stationary object.
- when overtaking a vehicle over a certain
period of time and the vehicle being
overtaken remains in the blind spot,
- you are driving on a straight or slightly
curved road,
- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a
caravan, etc.
149
Driving
Operating fault High pressure jet wash Parking sensors

When washing your vehicle, keep the
nozzle at least 12 inches (30 cm) away
In the event of a fault with the system,
from the sensors.
this warning lamp flashes for a few
seconds on the instrument panel, the
Service warning lamp comes on and a
message is displayed.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

workshop to have the system checked.
This system indicates the proximity of an

The system may suffer temporary
obstacle (examples: pedestrian, vehicle, tree,
interference in certain weather conditions
gate) which comes within the field of detection
(rain, hail, etc.).
of sensors located in the bumper.
In particular, driving on a wet surface or
Certain types of obstacle (examples: post,
the transition from a dry area to a wet area
roadworks cone) detected initially will no longer
can cause false alerts (e.g. the presence
be detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if
of water droplets in the blind spot is
they are located in blind spots in the sensors'
interpreted as a vehicle).
field of detection.
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
sensors are not covered with mud, ice or
snow.
Take care not to cover the warning zone in This system cannot in any circumstances replace
the door mirrors or the detection zones on the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
labels or other objects; they may hamper
the correct operation of the system.
The system is switched on by engaging reverse

gear.
This is confirmed by an audible signal.
150
Driving
The system is switched off when you come out Operating fault
of reverse gear.
If a fault occurs when shifting to
reverse, this warning lamp on the
Audible assistance instrument panel comes on, with a
message and an audible signal.
This supplements the audible signal by Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified

displaying bars in the screen which move workshop to have the system checked.
progressively nearer to the vehicle.
When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger"
symbol is displayed on the screen. In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
The proximity information is given by an sensors are not covered with mud, ice or
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of snow.
which increases as the vehicle approaches the Deactivation/Activation When reverse gear is engaged, an audible
obstacle. signal (long beep) indicates that the
The system is activated and deactivated from sensors may be dirty.
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or
6
the vehicle configuration menu. Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is
located. lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
When the distance between the vehicle and the audible signals of the parking sensor
the obstacle becomes less than approximately system.
The system will be deactivated
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
automatically if a trailer is being towed or a
continuous.
bicycle carrier is fitted on a towbar (vehicle
fitted with a towbar installed in line with
Visual assistance High pressure jet wash
the manufacturer's recommendations).
When washing your vehicle, keep the
nozzle at least 12 inches (30 cm) away
from the sensors.
151
Driving
Reversing camera The blue lines represent the general direction

of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to
Tyre under-inflation
the width of your vehicle with the mirrors). detection
The red line represents a distance of about
This system automatically monitors the tyre
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
pressure while driving.
bumper.
The green lines represent distances of about The system monitors the pressure in all four
1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your tyres, once the vehicle is moving.
vehicle's rear bumper. It compares the information given by the
The turquoise blue curves represent the wheel speed sensors with reference values,
maximum turning circle. which must be reinitialised after every tyre
pressure adjustment or wheel change.
The reversing camera is activated automatically The system triggers an alert as soon as it
It is normal to see part of the number plate
when reverse gear is engaged. detects a drop in the pressure of one or more
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The image is displayed on the touch screen. tyres.
The reversing camera function may be Opening the tailgate causes the display to
supplemented with parking sensors. disappear.
The tyre under-inflation detection system
does not replace the need for vigilance on
The reversing camera cannot, in any circumstances, Clean the reversing camera regularly the part of the driver.
replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. using a soft, dry cloth. This system still requires you to check the
tyre inflation pressure (including the spare
wheel) every month as well as before a
High pressure jet washing long journey.
When washing your vehicle, do not direct Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs
the nozzle within 30 cm of the camera handling, extends braking distances and
lens. causes early tyre wear, particularly in
adverse conditions (heavy loads, high
speeds, long journeys).
152
Driving
Driving with under-inflated tyres Under-inflation alert Reset

increases fuel consumption. The system must be reinitialised after any
This warning is indicated by
continuous illumination of the lamp, adjustment to the pressures of one or more
an audible signal and, depending on tyres, and after changing one or more wheels.
the equipment installed, a message
The tyre pressure specifications for your displayed on the screen.
vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive Before reinitialising the system, ensure
label.
steering movements and sudden braking. that the pressures of the four tyres
For more information on the
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do are correct for the conditions of use
Identification markings, refer to the
so. of the vehicle and conform to the
recommendations on the tyre pressure
label.
The loss of pressure detected does not
The under-inflation alert can only be relied
always cause visible bulging of the tyre.
on if the reinitialisation of the system has
Checking tyre pressures Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual
been done with the pressures in the four
This check should be done when the tyres check.
tyres correctly adjusted.
6
are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or
The under-inflation detection system
after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km)
does not give a warning if a pressure is
at moderate speeds). F If you have a compressor, such as the one incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures in the temporary puncture repair kit, check
shown on the label. the pressures of the four tyres when cold.
The system must be reset with the ignition on
F If it is not possible to make this check
and the vehicle stationary:
immediately, drive carefully at reduced
- via the vehicle configuration menu for
speed.
Snow chains vehicles fitted with a screen,
or
- via the instrument panel display or via
The system does not have to be F In case of a puncture, use the temporary
reinitialised after fitting or removing snow the button on the dashboard for vehicles
tyre repair kit or the spare wheel (if
chains. without a screen.
equipped).
- via the instrument panel display for vehicles
without a screen.
The alert is kept active until the system is

reinitialised.
153
Driving
Touch screen Instrument panel display screen Malfunction

The function is reset via the F Press this button briefly to go to
Vehicle / Driving menu. the menu.
F Select the corresponding item
then confirm.
F In the Vehicle / Driving menu, select the
"Driving functions" tab. The flashing and then fixed illumination of the
Reinitialisation is confirmed by a high-pitched
F In the page, select the "Under-inflation under-inflation warning light accompanied
audible signal.
reset" function. by illumination of the Service warning light
A deep tone audible signal indicates that the
F Select "Yes" to confirm. indicates a fault in the system.
reinitialisation has not been done.
A message is displayed and an audible signal A message appears, accompanied by an
goes off to confirm the reset operation. audible signal.
Dashboard button In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the

tyres is no longer provided.
Monochrome screen C Have the system checked by a CITROËN
The function is reset via the screen’s
"Personalisation-configuration"
menu. After carrying out any work on the system,
the pressure of the four tyres must be
F Select the "Define the vehicle checked and the system reinitialised.
parameters" menu.
F Select the "Comfort" menu. F Hold this button down.
F Select the "Tyre inflation" menu. Reset is confirmed by a high-pitched audible
F Select the "Reset" function. signal.
F Select "Yes" to confirm. A deep tone audible signal indicates that the
An audible signal confirms the reset operation. reset operation has not been done.
154
Driving
- record secure videos: a sensor Pairing is required for the initial connection
CITROËN ConnectedCAM™ (accelerometer) automatically activates the only. It will then be automatic.
(Depending on the country where the product is sold.) camera in the event of an impact, The default pairing code is: ConnectedCAM.
- share photos and videos by email, text
and on social media via the "CITROËN
ConnectedCAM™" application on a
smartphone.
Switching on
F Press and hold this button to
switch the camera on.
Since the use of the CITROËN The indicator lamp comes on.
ConnectedCAM™ is under your control
and your responsibility, you must When the camera is switched on, video
ensure that you enforce personal data recording is automatic and permanent.
protection regulations (images of other
people, vehicle registration plates, Switching off
protected buildings, etc.), the highway
code and road safety regulations. Verify F Press and hold this button to
6
beforehand that your insurance company switch the camera off.
accepts films collected by the CITROËN The indicator lamp goes off.
ConnectedCAM™ as evidence.
If you switch the camera off manually, it will
remain off even after the vehicle is restarted
and will have to be switched on manually.
Operation
With this wireless camera, installed at the top To use all camera functions, you must perform Managing photos and videos
of the windscreen, you can: the following operations:
- take photos and videos by pressing the F download the "CITROËN F Press this button briefly to take
dedicated control, ConnectedCAM™" application onto a a photo.
- send the vehicle's GPS coordinates to a smartphone,
smartphone, F pair the smartphone with the camera
following the instructions given by the An audible signal confirms that the request has
application. been acknowledged.
155
Driving
F Press and hold this button to

For safety reasons, the driver must not
record a video.
use the CITROËN ConnectedCAM™
application accessible from a smartphone
while driving. All actions requiring
An audible signal confirms that the request has
sustained attention must be performed
been acknowledged.
while the vehicle is stationary.
Thanks to the "CITROËN ConnectedCAM™"
application, you can then automatically and
immediately share your photos and videos on
social networks or by email.
A "micro USB" port also allows you to save Operating fault
data from the camera onto other media such as
computers, tablets, etc.
When a system fault occurs, the
warning lamp button flashes.
Resetting the system

qualified workshop.
Pressing and holding these two buttons

simultaneously resets the system.
This action clears all the data recorded on the
camera and resets the camera's default pairing
code.
156
FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH TOTAL QUARTZ
LUBRICANTS For more than 45 years, TOTAL
and CITROËN have shared common
values: excellence, creativity and
technological innovation.
It is in this same spirit that TOTAL has
developed a range of TOTAL QUARTZ
lubricants adapted to CITROËN
engines, making them even more
fuel efficient and protective of the
environment.
TOTAL and CITROËN test the
reliability and the performance of their
products during motorsport races in
extreme conditions.
Choose TOTAL QUARTZ lubricants
to maintain your vehicle, this is your
assurance of optimum durability and
performance from your engine.

Practical information
F Insert the key in the cap then turn it to the

Fuel tank For more information on Running out of
left, or turn the cap manually to the left
fuel (Diesel), refer to the corresponding
Tank capacity: (depending on version).
section.
- Petrol: approximately 45 litres.
- Diesel: approximately 42 or 50 litres
(depending on version).
Refilling
A self-adhesive label on the inner face of the
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use,
your vehicle, you must have the fuel
depending on your engine.
tank drained and filled with the correct
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in
fuel before starting the engine.
order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
Opening the filler cap may create a noise
caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is
entirely normal, resulting from the sealing of the
Low fuel level fuel system.
When the low fuel level is reached,
this warning lamp in the instrument
panel comes on, accompanied by
an audible warning, a message and
the last bar of the fuel gauge flashes
in red.
When it first comes on, about 5 litres of fuel F Remove the cap and place it on its support
remain in the tank. (on the filler flap).
This warning lamp will come on every time F Insert the filler nozzle and push it in as far
the ignition is switched on, accompanied as possible before starting to refuel (risk of
by a message and an audible signal, until To refuel in complete safety:
blowback).
a sufficient addition of fuel is made. This F You must switch off the engine.
F Hold it in this position throughout the filling
audible signal and message are repeated with F Open the filler flap.
operation.
increasing frequency as the fuel level drops F Take care to select the pump that delivers
and approaches "0". the correct type of fuel for your vehicle. Once you have finished refuelling:
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running F Refit the filler cap.
out.
158
F Turn the key to the right then remove it from

the cap, or turn the cap manually to the right
Misfuel prevention It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill
(depending on version). (Diesel) the tank.
To ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place
F Push the fuel flap to close it.
(Depending on the country of sale.) the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact
Mechanical device which prevents filling the with the flap of the misfuel prevention
tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It helps device and pour slowly.
If you are filling your tank to the top, do avoid the risk of engine damage that can result
not continue after the 3 rd cut-off; this could from filling with the wrong fuel.
cause malfunctions.
Travelling abroad
Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
which helps to reduce the level of harmful
emissions in the exhaust gases. Operation different in other countries, the presence
of the misfuel prevention device may make
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
refuelling impossible.
fuel.
Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with
The filler neck is narrower, allowing only
misfuel protection, so before travelling
unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced.
abroad, we recommend that you check
with the CITROËN dealer network,
whether your vehicle is suitable for the
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, fuel pumps in the country in which you
never refuel with the engine in STOP intend to travel.
7
mode; you must switch off the ignition
using the key, or the START/STOP button
if your vehicle has Keyless Entry and
Starting. When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into
the fuel filler neck of a diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Fuel cut-off Do not continue trying but introduce a
diesel filler nozzle instead.
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device

which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
collision.
159
Compatibility of fuels
Fuel used for petrol engines Diesel fuel that meets standard
The only Diesel additives authorised
EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that
for use are those that meet the
The petrol engines are compatible with biofuels meets standard EN14214 (possibly
B715000 standard.
that conform to current and future European containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl
standards and can be obtained from filling Ester),
Diesel at low temperature
stations: Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets
standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel At temperatures below 0°C (+32°F), the
Petrol that meets the EN228 standard, formation of paraffins in summer-type diesel
that meets standard EN14214 (possibly
mixed with a bio-fuel meeting the fuels could entail an abnormal operation
containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl
EN15376 standard. of the fuel supply circuit. To avoid this, we
Ester).
recommend using winter-type diesel fuel and
The use of B20 or B30 fuel that meets
keeping the fuel tank more than 50% full.
the standard EN16709 is possible
If, despite this, at temperatures below -15°C
The only petrol additives authorised with your Diesel engine. However, this
(+5°F) the engine has problems starting,
for use are those that meet the use, even occasional, requires strict
just leave the vehicle in a garage or heated
B715001 standard. application of the special servicing
workshop for a little while.
conditions referred to as "Arduous
conditions".
Fuel used for Diesel
engines
The diesel engines are compatible with biofuels For more information, contact a CITROËN Travelling abroad
that conform to current and future European dealer or a qualified workshop. Certain fuels could damage the engine of your
standards and can be obtained from filling vehicle.
stations. The use of any other type of (bio)fuel In certain countries, the use of a particular
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, fuel may be required (specific octane rating,
Diesel fuel that meets standard specific trade name, etc:) to ensure correct
domestic fuel, etc:) is strictly prohibited
EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets operation of the engine.
(risk of damage to the engine and fuel
standard EN14214 (possibly containing For any additional information, contact the
system).
up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester), dealer.
160
Installation tips Only use the chains designed to be fitted to the

Snow chains type of wheels fitted to your vehicle:
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve F If you have to fit the chains during a journey,
traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side
when braking. of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and, if necessary, Original tyre size Chain types
put wheel chocks against the wheels to
prevent your vehicle from sliding.
F Fit the chains following the instructions 185/65 R15
provided by the manufacturer. 195/65 R15 Maximum 9 mm link
F Move off gently and drive for a few seconds,
without exceeding 30 mph (50 km/h). 205/55 R16
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened. 205/50 R17 Cannot be fitted with chains
For more information on snow chains, contact a

It is strongly recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface.
The snow chains must be fitted only to the
front wheels. They must never be fitted to
7
"space-saver" type spare wheels.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads
that have been cleared of snow, to avoid
damaging your vehicle's tyres and the
road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with
Take account of the legislation in force alloy wheels, check that no part of the
in your country on the use of snow chain or its fixings is in contact with the
chains and the maximum running speed wheel rim.
authorised .
161
Towing a trailer Driving with a trailer places greater

demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.
For more information on Driving advice,
particularly when towing, refer to the
Please respect the maximum authorised

Your vehicle is primarily designed for It is behind the lower air intake grille.
towable weights, indicated on the
transporting people and luggage, but it may To have it removed, contact a CITROËN dealer
registration certificate or in your vehicle’s
also be used for towing a trailer. or a qualified workshop.
technical data.
We recommend the use of genuine

CITROËN tow-bars and their harnesses For more information on Weights (and the
that have been tested and approved from towed loads which apply to your vehicle)
the design stage of your vehicle, and that refer to the corresponding section.
the fitting of the tow-bar is entrusted to a
If the tow-bar is not fitted by a CITROËN
dealer, it must still be fitted in accordance Blanking plug
with the vehicle manufacturer's When towing, it is essential to remove the
instructions. blanking plug if your vehicle is equipped with it.
162
- for more than ten minutes, to use the

Load reduction mode Energy economy mode equipment for up to approximately thirty
System which manages the use of certain System which manages the duration of use of minutes.
functions according to the level of charge certain functions to conserve a sufficient level Let the engine run for the duration specified to
remaining in the battery. of charge in the battery. ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load After the engine has stopped, you can still use Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the
reduction function temporarily deactivates functions such as the audio and telematics engine in order to charge the battery.
certain functions, such as air conditioning, system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam
heated rear screen, etc. headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a
The deactivated functions are reactivated maximum combined duration of about forty
automatically as soon as conditions permit. minutes. A flat battery prevents the engine from
starting.
Switching to this mode For more information on the 12 V battery,
A message appears in the instrument panel screen
indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy
mode and the active functions are put on standby.
If a telephone call is being made at this

time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free
7
system of your audio system.
Exiting the mode

These functions will be automatically restored
the next time the vehicle is used.
In order to restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes,
163
Changing a wiper blade Refitting Roof bars

F Position and clip the new wiper blade to the
For safety reasons and to avoid damaging
arm.
Before removing a front F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
the roof, it is essential to use the
transverse bars approved for your vehicle.
wiper
After refitting a front wiper
Observe the fitting instructions and the
conditions of use in the guide supplied with the
F Switch on the ignition. roof bars.
F Operate the wiper lever again to park the
wiper blades.
Its replacement should be carried out only

by a CITROËN dealer or in a qualified
workshop.
F Within one minute after switching off

the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on the When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing
windscreen. points located in the roof frame. The points are
or masked by the vehicle doors when closed.
F A minute after switching off the ignition,
straighten the arms manually.
Removing
F Lift the corresponding wiper arm.
F Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
164
Maximum load distributed across the Bonnet

roof bars, for a load height not exceeding
40 cm: 70 kg.
As this value can be changed, please
verify the maximum load mentioned in the
note delivered with the roof bars.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
deactivate the Stop & Start system to
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
avoid the risk of injury related to an
road to avoid damaging the roof bars and
automatic change to START mode.
the mountings on the vehicle.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
The roof bars mountings include a stud to be order to comply with the regulations for
fitted to the hole at each fixing point. transporting objects which are longer than The location of the interior bonnet release
the vehicle. lever prevents opening of the bonnet when
the left-hand front door is shut.
Recommendations
F Distribute the load uniformly, taking care When the engine is hot, handle the
to avoid overloading one of the sides. exterior safety catch and the stay with
F Arrange the heaviest part of the load as care (risk of burns), using the protected
close as possible to the roof. area.
7
F Lash the load securely and fit a warning When the bonnet is open, take care not to
flag if it overhangs the vehicle. damage the safety catch.
F Drive gently: the vehicle will be more Do not open the bonnet under very windy
susceptible to the effects of side winds conditions.
(the stability of the vehicle may be
affected).
F Remove the roof bars once they are no The cooling fan may start after
longer needed. switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might be
caught by the fan blades.
165
Opening
F Open the left-hand front door.
F Pull the lever, located at the bottom of the

door aperture, towards you.
F Unclip the stay from its housing and place it

in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
Closing
F Take the stay out of the support notch.
F Clip the stay in its housing.
F Lower the bonnet and release it near the
end of its travel.
F Pull on the bonnet to check that it is fully
latched.
F Lift the lever and raise the bonnet.
Because of the presence of electrical

equipment under the bonnet, it is
recommended that exposure to water
(rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
166
These engines are examples provided as a

Engines guide.
Petrol The locations of the dipstick and engine oil filler
cap may vary.
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir.

2. Engine coolant reservoir.
3. Brake fluid reservoir.
4. Battery.
5. Fusebox.
6. Air filter.
7. Engine oil dipstick.
8. Engine oil filler cap.
9. Remote earth point.
10. Priming pump*.
Diesel The diesel circuit is under very high

pressure.
All work on this circuit must be carried out
7
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
* Depending on engine.
167
Checking levels Do not discard used oil or fluids into

Checking using the dipstick
sewers or onto the ground.
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer The location of the dipstick is shown in the
the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them
or a qualified workshop and dispose corresponding underbonnet layout view.
up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
of in the containers reserved for this F Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and
If a level drops significantly, have the
purpose. pull it out completely.
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop. F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth.
F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
Engine oil level pull it out again to make the visual check:
The liquid must comply with the the correct level is between marks A and B.
manufacturer's recommendations and with The check is carried out either when
the vehicle's engine. the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel for vehicles equipped with an
Take care when working under the bonnet, electric gauge, or using the dipstick.
as certain areas of the engine may be
extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
cooling fan could start at any time (even To ensure that the reading is correct, your A = MAX
with the ignition off). vehicle must be parked on a level surface
with the engine stopped for more than B = MIN
30 minutes.
Used products It is normal to top up the oil level between

two services (or oil changes). CITROËN
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or recommends that you check the level, and top If you find that the level is above the A mark or
fluids with the skin. up if necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). below the B mark, do not start the engine.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health
- If the level is above the MAX mark (risk of
or indeed very corrosive.
damage to the engine), contact a CITROËN
168
- If the level is below the MIN mark, you must Coolant level
After topping up the oil, the check when
top up the engine oil.
switching on the ignition with the oil level
indicator in the instrument panel is not
Check the coolant level regularly.
valid during the 30 minutes after ttopping
It is normal to top up the fluid
Oil grade up.
between two services.
Before topping up the oil or changing the oil,
check that the oil is the correct grade for your
Engine oil change To ensure that the reading is correct, your
engine and conforms to the manufacturer's
vehicle must be parked on a level surface with
recommendations. Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule
the engine cool.
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine The coolant level should be close to the "MAX"
Topping up the engine oil level and emissions control system, never use mark but should never exceed it.
additives in the engine oil. If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark,
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the it is essential to top up.
corresponding underbonnet layout view. A low coolant level presents a risk of serious
F Unscrew the oil filler cap to access the filler damage to your engine.
opening. Brake fluid level
F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
The fluid level should be close to the When the engine is warm, the temperature of
spills on engine components (risk of fire).
"MAX" mark. If it is not, check the the coolant is regulated by the fan.
F Wait a few minutes before checking the
7
level again using the dipstick. brake pad wear. In addition, as the cooling system is
F Add more oil if necessary. pressurised, wait at least one hour after
F After checking the level, carefully refit the oil switching off the engine before carrying out any
filler cap and the dipstick in its tube. Changing the coolant work.
To avoid the risk of scalding when you need to
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule top up in an emergency, place a cloth around
for details of the interval for this operation. the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to
allow the pressure to drop.
Once the pressure has dropped, remove the
Fluid specification cap and top up to the required level.
This fluid must conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
169
The cooling fan may start after Diesel fuel additive level Checks
switching off the engine: take care (diesel with particle filter) Unless otherwise indicated, check these
with articles and clothing that might be
components in accordance with the
caught by the fan blades.
The additive reservoir low level is manufacturer's service schedule and according
indicated by fixed illumination of this to your engine.
Fluid specification warning lamp, accompanied by an Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN
audible signal and a message that dealer or a qualified workshop.
The brake fluid must conform to the the particle filter additive level is
manufacturer's recommendations. too low.
12 V battery
Screenwash fluid level Topping up The battery does not require any
maintenance.
The reservoir must be topped up without delay
However, check regularly that the terminals
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Top up to the required level when are correctly tightened (versions without
necessary. quick release terminals) and that the
connections are clean.
For more information and the precautions

Fluid specification Level of Adblue to take before starting work on the 12 V
battery, refer to the corresponding
The screenwash fluid must be topped up with a An alert is triggered once the reserve level is section.
ready for use mix. reached.
In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid To avoid the vehicle being immobilised as per
with antifreeze must be used that is appropriate regulations, you must top up with AdBlue.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are
for the prevailing conditions, in order to For more information on AdBlue ® and the SCR
fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of
preserve the elements of the system (pump, system, and in particular topping it up, refer to
specific technology and specification.
tank, ducts, etc.). the corresponding section.
Its replacement should be carried out
Filling with pure water is prohibited under all
only by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
circumstances (risk of freezing, limestone
workshop.
deposits, etc.).
170
Air filter and passenger compartment filter As soon as the traffic conditions permit, Automatic gearbox
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed
Refer to the manufacturer’s
of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the
service schedule for details of the The gearbox does not require any
warning lamp goes off.
replacement intervals for these maintenance (no oil change).
If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates
components.
a low additive level.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty For more information on Checking the
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. levels and particularly on the level of
city driving), replace them twice as often if diesel additive, refer to the corresponding Brake pads
necessary. section.
Brake wear depends on the style
A clogged passenger compartment filter may On a new vehicle, the first particle
of driving, particularly in the case
have an adverse effect on the performance filter regeneration operations may be
of vehicles used in town, over short
of the air conditioning system and generate accompanied by a "burning" smell, which
distances. It may be necessary to
undesirable odours. is perfectly normal.
have the condition of the brakes
Following prolonged operation of the
checked, even between vehicle
Oil filter vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
services.
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
Change the oil filter each time the notice the emission of water vapour at the Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
engine oil is changed. exhaust on acceleration. This does not the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
Refer to the manufacturer’s affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the pads are worn.
service schedule for details of environment.
7
the replacement interval for this
component.
Brake disc wear
Particle filter (Diesel) For information on checking brake
Manual gearbox disc wear, contact a CITROËN or a
The start of saturation of the particle qualified workshop.
filter is indicated by the constant The gearbox does not require any
illumination of this warning lamp maintenance (no oil change).
accompanied by an alert message.
171
Parking brake AdBlue® (BlueHDi Once the AdBlue ® tank is empty, a system
If excessive travel or a loss of engines) required by regulations prevents starting
of the engine.
effectiveness of this system is
To respect the environment and ensure If the SCR system is defective, the level of
noticed, the parking brake must
compliance with the new Euro 6 standard, emissions from your vehicle will no longer
be checked, even between two
without adversely affecting the performance or meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle
services.
fuel consumption of diesel engines, CITROËN becomes polluting.
Checking this system must be done by a has taken the decision to equip its vehicles In the event of a confirmed fault with the
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. with system that associates SCR (Selective SCR system, you must go to a CITROËN
Catalytic Reduction) with a particle filter (DPF) dealer or a qualified workshop as soon
for the treatment of exhaust gases. as possible: after a running distance of
650 miles (1,100 km), a system will be
Only use products recommended by
triggered automatically to prevent engine
CITROËN or products of equivalent quality
and specification. SCR system starting.
In either case, a range indicator gives you
In order to optimise the operation of units Using a liquid called AdBlue ® that contains the distance you can travel before the
as important as those in the braking urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of vehicle is immobilised.
system, CITROËN selects and offers very the oxides of nitrogen (NOx) into nitrogen and
specific products. water, which are harmless to health and the
After washing the vehicle, dampness, or environment.
in wintry conditions, ice can form on the
Freezing of the AdBlue ®
brake discs and pads: braking efficiency The AdBlue ® is contained in a special tank
AdBlue ® freezes at temperatures below
may be reduced. Make light brake holding about 15 litres. Its capacity allows a
around -11°C.
applications to dry and defrost the brakes. driving range of around 11,000 miles (18,000
The SCR system includes a heater for the
km). An alert system is triggered automatically
AdBlue ® tank, allowing you to continue
once the reserve level is reached: you can
driving in all weather conditions.
then drive for a further 1,500 miles (2,400 km)
before the tank is empty.
172
Topping up with AdBlue® Never dilute AdBlue ® with water. Never store AdBlue ® containers in your
Never pour AdBlue ® into the diesel fuel vehicle.
Precautions for use tank.
The AdBlue ® is a urea-based solution. This
liquid is non-flammable, colourless and Procedure
odourless (kept in a cool area).
Before topping up, ensure that the vehicle is
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the
parked on a flat and level surface.
affected area with soap and water. In the event
In wintry conditions, ensure that the
of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the
temperature of the vehicle is above -11°C.
eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye
Otherwise the AdBlue ® may be frozen and
wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If you feel
so cannot be poured into its tank. Park your
a persistent burning sensation or irritation, get
vehicle in a warmer area for a few hours to
medical attention.
allow the top up to be carried out.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth Containers are available from a CITROËN
with clean water and then drink plenty of water. dealer or a qualified workshop.
In certain conditions (high ambient
temperature, for example), the risk of release of
ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the
Never top up from an AdBlue ® dispenser Park the vehicle
reserved for heavy goods vehicles.
fluid. Ammonia has an irritant effect on mucous
membranes (eyes, nose and throat). F Switch off the ignition to stop the engine
7
and remove the key from the switch.
or
Recommendations on storage
F With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the
AdBlue ® freezes at about -11°C and "START/STOP" button to stop the engine.
deteriorates above 25°C. Bottles should be
Keep AdBlue ® out of the reach of children, stored in a cool area and protected from direct
in its original container. sunlight.
Never transfer AdBlue ® to another Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept
container: it would lose its purity. for at least a year.
If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it
has completely thawed out.
Use only AdBlue ® liquid that meets the
ISO 22241 standard.
173
Topping up If any fluid is spilt or splashed, wash

immediately with cold water or wipe with a
damp cloth.
If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off
using a sponge and hot water.
Refit the filler cap

F Obtain a AdBlue container. After first
®
F Refit the blue cap to the tank filler and turn it
checking the use-by date, read the a 4th of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
instructions on the label carefully before F Close the fuel filler flap.
pouring the contents of the container into
your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank.
Important: in the event of a top-up after a

Important: if your vehicle's AdBlue ® tank breakdown because of a lack of AdBlue,
is completely empty – confirmed by the you must wait around 5 minutes before
alert messages and the impossibility of switching on the ignition, without opening
Open the filler
starting the engine – you must add at least the driver’s door, locking the vehicle,
F When the vehicle is unlocked, open the filler 4 litres and no more than 10 litres. introducing the key into the ignition
flap. switch, or introducing the key of the
F Turn the blue cap a quarter turn anti- Keyless Entry and Starting system into
clockwise. the passenger compartment.
F Take the blue cap away. Switch on the ignition, then wait for
F After emptying the container, wipe away any
10 seconds before starting the engine.
spillage around the tank filler using a damp
cloth.
174
Protections AIRBUMP®
Implemented in TPU (Thermoplastic
polyurethane) and enclosing air bubbles, they
act as shock absorbers.
Located on the sides of your vehicle, they
protect the bodywork by dampening the small
impacts of everyday life: parking pillars, door
opening, scratches, etc.
Maintenance of AIRBUMP ®
7
The AIRBUMP ® do not require any special
maintenance.
They are simply cleaned using water
or one of the products available in the
CITROËN network.
To guarantee proper ageing of the
AIRBUMP ®, do not use polish.
175
In the event of a breakdown
Running out of fuel Other HDi engines Temporary puncture

(diesel) (except BlueHDi version) repair kit
On vehicles fitted with diesel engines, the fuel F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
system must be primed if you run out of fuel. diesel.
Comprising a compressor and a sealant
F Open the engine bonnet.
cartridge, it allows the temporary repair of
F If necessary, unclip the style cover to
a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest
For more information on Misfuel access the priming pump.
garage.
prevention (diesel), refer to the It is designed to repair most punctures which
corresponding section. could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
If the engine does not start first time, don't

keep trying, but start the procedure again F Operate the priming pump repeatedly until The vehicle's electric system allows the
from the beginning. resistance is felt (there may be resistance at connection of the compressor for long
the first press). enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the repair.
BlueHDi engines engine does not start at the first attempt,
wait around 15 seconds before trying
F Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of again). Under-inflation detection
Diesel. F If the engine does not start after a few After repair of the tyre, the warning
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the attempts, operate the priming pump again lamp will remain on until the system is
engine). then start the engine. reinitialised.
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the F Put the style cover in place and clip it in. For more information on Under-inflation
ignition. F Close the bonnet again. detection, refer to the corresponding
F Repeat the operation 10 times. section.
F Operate the starter to run the engine.
176
Access to the kit The speed limit sticker must be secured Avoid removing any foreign bodies which
to the interior of the vehicle in the driver's have penetrated into the tyre.
field of vision, to remind you that a wheel
is in temporary use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired
using this type of kit.
Repair procedure
This kit is installed in the storage box, under
the boot floor. F Switch off the ignition. F Turn the sealant bottle and secure it in the
F Secure the speed limit sticker inside the cut-out provided on the compressor.
vehicle.
Kit contents F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the F Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
compressor. repaired, and place it in a clean area.
1. 12 V compressor, with built-in pressure

8
gauge.
2. Bottle of sealant, with built-in hose. F Connect the pipe from the compressor to
F Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant
3. Speed limit sticker. the bottle of sealant.
to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and
tighten firmly.
177
F Check that the compressor switch is at F Switch on the compressor by moving the
Take care, the sealant product is harmful
the "O" position. switch to the position "I" until the tyre
if swallowed and causes irritation to the
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under pressure reaches 2.0 bars. The sealant is
eyes.
the compressor. injected under pressure into the tyre; do not
Keep this product out of the reach of
disconnect the hose from the valve during
children.
this operation (risk of splashing).
The use-by date is marked on the bottle.
After use, do not discard the bottle by the
roadside, take it to a CITROËN dealer or
an authorised waste disposal site.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure Don't forget to obtain a new bottle of
of 2 bars is not attained, this indicates sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer
that the tyre is not repairable; contact a or a qualified workshop.
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
for assistance.
F Connect the compressor's electrical

connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition. F Place the switch in the "O" position. Checking / adjusting tyre
F Remove the kit. pressures
You can also use the compressor,
without injecting sealant, to check and, if
necessary, adjust the tyre pressures
F Remove the valve cap from the tyre and

place it in a clean area.
F Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
F Drive immediately for approximately three miles compressor.
(five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and
35 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using
the kit.
178
Spare wheel
Procedure for changing a damaged wheel with
the spare wheel using the tools provided with
the vehicle.
Access to the tools
F Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten F Switch on the compressor by moving the
firmly. switch to the position "I" and adjust the
F Check that the compressor switch is at pressure as shown on the vehicle tyre
the "O" position. pressure label. To deflate: press the black
F Uncoil fully the electric cable, stowed under button on the compressor hose by the valve
the compressor. connector.
F Once the correct pressure is reached, put
the switch to the "O" position.
F Remove the kit then stow it. The tools are installed in the boot under the
floor.
To gain access:
F open the boot,
F lift the floor and remove it,
F remove the storage box containing the
8
Should the pressure of one or more tyres
be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise tools.
the under-inflation detection system.
For more information on Under-inflation
detection, refer to the corresponding
F Connect the compressor's electrical section.
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Switch on the ignition.
179
List of tools Depending on engine, the spare wheel is

All of these tools are specific to your
a standard wheel or the space-saver type
vehicle and may vary according to the
(BlueHDi).
level of equipment.
Do not use them for any other purposes.
Taking out the wheel
The jack must only be used to change a wheel
with a damaged or punctured tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one supplied
with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
workshop to obtain the correct jack for it.
The jack meets European standards, as
defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
The jack does not require any maintenance.
1. Wheel wrench.
For removing the hub cap and removing F Unclip the tool storage box (standard spare
the wheel bolts. wheel).
2. Jack with integrated crank. Access to the spare wheel F Unscrew the central nut.
Used to raise the vehicle. F Remove the fixing parts (nut and bolt).
3. Wheel bolt cover removal tool. F Raise the spare wheel towards you from the
For removal of the alloy wheel bolt covers rear.
or the central bolt cover (depending on F Take the wheel out of the boot.
version).
4. Removable towing eye.
For more information on Towing, refer to the

associated section.
The spare wheel is located in the boot under

the floor.
180
Putting the wheel back in place If there is no wheel in the well, the Wheel with wheel trim
fastening device (nut and bolt) cannot be When removing the wheel, first remove
refitted. the wheel trim using wheelbrace 1 by
pulling at the valve aperture.
When refitting the wheel, after tightening
Removing a wheel the wheel bolts, refit the wheel trim,
starting by placing its aperture in line with
the valve and then pushing it into place all
Parking the vehicle
round its edge with the palm of your hand.
Stop the vehicle where it does not block
traffic: the ground must be level, stable
and non-slippery.
Apply the parking brake, switch off the List of operations
F Put the wheel back in its housing.
ignition and engage first gear * so as to
F Give the bolt a few turns to loosen it.
block the wheels.
F Position the fixing parts (nut and bolt) in the
Check that the parking brake warning
middle of the wheel.
light illuminates steadily in the instrument
F Tighten the central nut to retain the wheel
panel.
correctly.
The occupants must get out of the vehicle
and wait where they are safe.
Make sure that the jack is correctly
positioned at one of the vehicle's jacking
points.
Incorrect use of the jack could cause the
vehicle to collapse.
8
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
F Remove each wheel bolt cover using tool 3

(depending on version).
F Loosen the bolts using wheelbrace 1 only.
F Clip the tool storage box back into place * position P for the automatic gearbox
(standard spare wheel).
181
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the

ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
slip or collapse – Risk of injury!
Take care to place the jack only at the
jacking points A or B under the vehicle,
making sure that the jack head is centred
at the contact point on the vehicle.
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the
vehicle and/or the jack collapsing – Risk
of injury!
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean

place.
F Remove the wheel.
Stowing the damaged wheel

The damaged wheel can be stowed under
the floor, in the standard spare wheel
housing.
To stow an alloy wheel, first remove the
hub cap from the middle of the wheel so
that the fastening device (nut and bolt) can
F Extend the jack 2 until its head comes into
be put in place.
contact with the jacking point A or B used;
In the case of a "space-saver" type spare
the contact area A or B on the vehicle must
F Place the foot of jack 2 on the ground and wheel, the damaged wheel cannot be
be correctly inserted into the central part of
ensure that it is directly below the front stowed under the floor. It must be stowed
the head of the jack.
A or rear B jacking point provided on the in the boot; use a cover to protect the
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
underbody, whichever is closest to the inside of the boot.
space between the wheel and the ground
wheel to be changed.
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
182
Fitting a wheel List of operations
F Tighten the bolts using wheelbrace 1 only.

F Refit the wheel bolt cover (alloy wheels).
Fastening the spare wheel F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Stow the tools in their box.
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, F Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is F Pre-tighten the bolts using wheelbrace
normal to notice that the washers do not 1 only.
come into contact with the spare wheel.
The wheel is secured by the conical
contact of each bolt.
After changing a wheel

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving
with the "space-saver" type spare wheel fitted.
8
Visit a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop as soon as possible to have the
tightness of the bolts and the pressure of the
spare wheel checked.
Have the punctured tyre examined. After
inspection, the technician will advise you on F Lower the vehicle again fully.
whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must F Fold jack 2 and detach it.
be replaced.
183
Changing a bulb Light emitting diodes (LED) In some weather conditions (e.g. low
For the replacement of this type of bulbs, temperature or humidity), the presence
The headlamps have polycarbonate you must contact a CITROËN dealer or a of misting on the internal surface of the
lenses with a protective coating: qualified workshop. glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is
F do not clean them using a dry or normal; it disappears after the lamps have
abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent been on for a few minutes.
or solvent product, Halogen bulbs
F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH To ensure good quality lighting, check
neutral product, that the bulb is correctly positioned in its
F when using a high pressure washer housing. Front lamps
on persistent marks, do not keep the
lance directed towards the lamps or Model with halogen headlamps
their edges for too long, so as not to
damage their protective coating and Do not touch the "Full LED" technology
seals. headlamps. Risk of electrocution!
Call on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing a bulb should only be done after

the headlamp has been switched off for Opening of bonnet / Access to bulbs
several minutes (risk of serious burns). Engine warm, proceed with caution – Risk
F Do not touch the bulb directly with your of burns!
fingers, use a lint-free cloth. Take care with objects or clothing that
1. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps
It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet could caught in the blades of the engine
(W21/5W).
(UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the fan – Risk of strangulation!
headlamp. 2. Direction indicators (PY21W).
Always replace a failed bulb with a new 3. Dipped beam headlamps (H7).
bulb with the same type and specification. 4. Main beam headlamps (H7).
5. Foglamps (PSX24W).
184
Model with LED lamps To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
Amber colour bulbs, such as the direction
order.
indicators, must be replaced by bulbs with
identical colour and specifications.
Daytime running lamps/
sidelamps (LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of diode lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified Dipped beam headlamps
workshop.
Direction indicators
Quicker flashing of the direction indicator

1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps (LED).* light (left or right) indicates that one of
2. Direction indicators (PY21W). the bulbs on the corresponding side has
3. Dipped beam headlights (H7). failed.
4. Main beam headlights (H7).
5. Fog lights (PSX24W).
F Remove the protective cover by pulling the

Daytime running lamps/sidelamps tab.
F Disconnect the bulb connector.
F Pull the bulb out and change it.
8
To refit, perform the operations in reverse
order, turning the lamp’s positioning lug
upwards.
F Turn the bulb holder an eighth of a turn anti-

clockwise and extract it.
F Turn the bulb holder an eighth of a turn anti- F Remove the bulb and replace it.
clockwise and extract it.
F Remove the bulb and replace it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
* LED: light emitting diodes. order.
185
Main beam headlamps Foglamps F Tilt the screwdriver and use it as a lever to
extract the glass.
F Unclip the shell of the door mirror by
pressing on the two fixing clips.
F Remove the protective cover by pulling the For the replacement of this type of lamp,
tab. contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
F Disconnect the bulb connector. workshop. F Press the central tongue and remove the
F Pull the bulb out and change it. side repeater.
F Pull out the bulb holder and replace the
To refit, perform the operations in reverse Integrated flashing indicator side faulty lamp.
order, turning the lamp’s positioning lug repeaters To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
downwards. order.
To replace this type of bulb, you can also

workshop.
F Insert a flat screwdriver between the door

mirror glass and its base.
186
Rear lamps F Remove the access cover on the

Make sure to engage the lamp unit in its
corresponding side trim.
guides while keeping it in line with the vehicle.
F Disconnect the lamp connector.
Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but
F Unscrew the nut and remove it (ensure it
without damaging the light.
does not fall inside the wing).
F Unclip the lamp unit and carefully extract it
pulling straight towards you. Third brake lamp (4 T10 W5W
bulbs)
A standard pair of pliers or the wheelbrace

(depending on equipment) may be necessary
1. Sidelamps (R10W). to remove the nut.
2. Brake lamps (P21W).
3. Direction indicators (PY21W).
4. Reversing lamp (P21W) or foglamp
(PR21W).
Changing bulbs
F Open the boot, unclip the plastic covers.
F Push the two lugs with a screwdriver.
F Take the lamp out via the outside of the lid.
F Disconnect the connector.
F
8
Turn the bulb holder corresponding to the
F Move the maintenance flaps of the bulb faulty lamp a quarter turn and pull it out.
holder away and remove it. F Pull the bulb out and change it.
F Turn the bulb a quarter turn, pull it out and To refit, perform these operations in reverse
fit a new bulb. order, verifying that the screenwash fluid
nozzle is on the left side.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
These bulbs are changed from inside the boot. order.
F Open the boot.
187
Number plate lamps (W5W) Interior lighting Boot (W5W)

Courtesy lamp (W5W)
For easier removal, perform this procedure with

the tailgate half open.
F Insert a thin screwdriver into the cut-out F Unclip the unit by pushing the base from
located outside the lens. F Using a thin, flap tip screwdriver, unclip the behind.
F Lift it to unclip it. entire console surrounding the courtesy F Pull the bulb out and change it.
F Remove the lens. lamp. F Put the unit back in place.
F Change the faulty bulb. F Remove the defective bulb and change it.
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place. F Fit the console back into place around the
courtesy lamp and clip it correctly.
If changing a bulb within a few minutes

of switching off the ignition, take care not Courtesy lamp with LED
to touch the silencer – there is a risk of For the replacement of LEDs, contact a
burns! CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
188
To remove or fit a fuse, it is essential to:

Changing a fuse F use the special tweezers to extract the fuse
Access to tooling from its housing and check the condition of
its filament,
The extraction tweezers are fitted to the back F always replace the defective fuse with a
of the dashboard fusebox cover. fuse of the same rating (same colour); using
a different rating could cause a malfunction
(risk of fire).
If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have
the electrical system checked by a CITROËN
The extraction tweezers are fitted to the back
of the dashboard fusebox cover.
F Open the glove box lid.
F Unclip the fusebox protection cover.
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it
over.
F Remove the tweezers from the back of the
cover.
F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left,
then right. OK NOK
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it
over.
Changing a fuse
F Remove the tweezers from the back of the Before changing a fuse, it is necessary to:
F identify the cause of the failure and correct
8
cover.
it,
F switch off all electrical consumers, Tweezers
F stop the vehicle and switch off the ignition,
F identify the defective fuse using the The replacement of a fuse not shown in
allocation tables and the diagrams in the the allocation tables opposite may cause
following pages, a serious malfunction of your vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
189
Fuses in the dashboard The 2 fuseboxes are located in the lower part of
Installing electrical accessories
the dashboard, in the glove box.
Your vehicle's electrical system is
F Open the glove box.
designed to operate with standard or
Access to the fuses F Unclip the fusebox protection cover.
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your vehicle,
workshop.
CITROËN will not accept responsibility for

the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting
from the installation of accessories
not supplied and not recommended by
CITROËN and not installed in accordance The 2 fuseboxes are located in the lower part of
with its instructions, in particular when the dashboard, below the steering wheel.
the combined consumption of all of the F Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left,
additional equipment connected exceeds then right.
10 milliamperes.
190
Upper fusebox
Fuse Rating
Functions
N° (A)
F29 - Not used.
F30 30 Rear screen, demisting.
F31 10 Demisting mirrors.
F32 - Not used.
F33 40 Front electric windows.
F34 40 Rear electric windows.
F35 30 Front heated seats.
F36 - Not used.
F37 - Not used.
8
F38 - Not used.
F39 - Not used.
F40 - Not used.
191
Lower fusebox Fuse Rating

Functions
N° (A)
Electrochrome rear view mirror, demisting rear screen, Diesel

F1 10 particle filter, parking sensors, power steering, LPG system,
clutch pedal switch, door mirror adjustment.
F10(+) – Locking/Unlocking for doors and fuel filler flap (depending on

30
F11(Gnd) engine).
F13 10 Rain and light sensor, air conditioning, front camera.
F14 5 Alarm, telematic unit.
Automatic gearbox speed selector, brake pedal switch, Stop &

F16 3
Start system.
F17 5 Instrument panel, driving school module.
Air conditioning, speed selector position indicator (automatic

F18 5
gearbox).
F19 3 Steering mounted controls.
F21 3 START/STOP switch or button.
F23 5 Seat belts not fastened warning lamps display.
F24 5 Parking sensors, rear camera, telematic screen.
F25 5 Airbag control unit.
F29 20 Telematic radio.
F31 15 Radio (retrofitting).
F32 15 Front 12V socket.

192
Headlamp adjustment, diagnostic socket, additional heating Engine compartment fuses

F35 5
(depending on equipment).
F36 5 Front map reading light.
F4 15 Audible warning.
F6(+) –
20 Front and rear screenwash pump.
F5(Gnd)
F8 20 Rear wiper.
F9 5 Front courtesy lamp.
The fusebox is located in the engine

compartment near the battery.
Access to the fuses

F Unclip the cover.
F Change the fuse.
F When you have finished, close the cover
very carefully to ensure correct sealing of
the fusebox.
193
Fuse Rating
Functions
No. (A)
F1 40 Air conditioning.
F10 15 Engine management.
F14 5 Battery state of charge unit (depending on engine).
F15 5 Not used.
F16 20 Front foglamp.
F18 10 Right hand main beam headlamp.
F19 10 Left hand main beam headlamp.
F2 60 ABS/ESP.
F21 30 Starter (depending on engine).
F22 30 Not used.
F23 40 Starter unit (if Stop & Start and depending on engine).
F24 40 Passenger compartment fusebox.
F25 40 Trailer attachment preparation.
194
F26 15 Automatic gearbox or LPG system. 12 V battery

F27 25 Built-in systems interface (BSI). Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or charging a discharged battery.
F28 30 Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue ®).
F29 40 Windscreen wipers.
F3 50 Passenger compartment fusebox.

General points
F30 40 Diesel pre-heater. Lead-acid starter batteries
F31 80 Additional heater (depending on equipment). Batteries contain harmful substances

such as sulphuric acid and lead.
F32 80 Power steering.
They must be disposed of in
F4 30 ABS/ESP. accordance with regulations and must
not, in any circumstances, be discarded
F5 70 Built-in services interface (BSI). with household waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
F6 60 Engine fan group.
vehicle batteries to a special collection
F7 80 Built-in services interface (BSI). point.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
8
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources of
sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion
or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
195
Access to the battery Starting using another

battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a backup battery
(external or from another vehicle) and jump
leads or a battery booster.
Never try to start the engine by connecting

a battery charger.
F Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
your vehicle has one.
booster.
The battery is located under the bonnet. F Connect the red cable to the positive
Check beforehand that the backup
For access to the (+) terminal: terminal (+) of flat battery A (at the metal
battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and
F unlock the bonnet by activating the internal elbow) then to the positive terminal (+) of
a capacity at least equal to that of the
control, then the external control, backup battery B or the booster.
discharged battery.
F lift the bonnet, then hold it in place with its F Connect one end of the green or black
The two vehicles must not be in contact
prop. cable to the negative terminal (-) of backup
with each other.
battery B or the booster (or an earth point
Switch off all the electrical consumers
on the other vehicle).
(+) Positive terminal. on both vehicles (audio system, wipers,
F Connect the other end of the green or black
It has a quick-release clamp. lighting, etc.).
cable to earth point C on the broken down
Make sure that the jump leads are not
(-) Negative terminal. vehicle.
close to moving parts of the engine (fan,
As the battery's negative terminal is not belts, etc.).
accessible, a remote earth point is placed on F Start the engine of the vehicle with the
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while
the structure of the front right wing. good battery and leave it running for a few
the engine is running.
minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine turn.
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few moments
before trying again.
196
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then

If you plan to charge your vehicle's battery
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
yourself, use only a charger compatible
reverse order.
with lead-acid batteries of a nominal
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
voltage of 12 V.
your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle If this label is present, it is essential to
stationary, so that the battery reaches an use only a 12 V charger to avoid causing
Follow the instructions provided by the
adequate state of charge. irreversible damage to the electrical
manufacturer of the charger.
components related to the Stop & Start
Never reverse polarities.
system.
Some functions, including Stop & Start,
are not available if the battery is not It is not necessary to disconnect the
sufficiently charged. battery. Never try to charge a frozen battery – risk
of explosion!
F Switch off the ignition. If the battery has frozen, have it checked
F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio by a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified
Charging the battery using system, lighting, wipers, etc.). workshop who will check that the internal
a battery charger components have not been damaged and
F Switch off the charger B before connecting
For optimum service life of the battery, it is that the container has not cracked, which
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
essential to maintain an adequate state of would mean a risk of toxic and corrosive
dangerous sparks.
acid leaking.
charge. F Ensure that the charger cables are in good
In some circumstances it may be necessary to condition.
charge the battery: F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has
8
- if you only use your vehicle for short one, on the (+) terminal. Disconnecting the battery
journeys, F Connect the charger B cables as follows:
- if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for - the positive (+) red cable to the (+) In order to maintain an adequate state
several weeks. terminal of the battery A, of charge for starting the engine, it is
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified - the negative (-) black cable to the earth recommended that the battery be disconnected
workshop. point C on the vehicle. if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long
F At the end of the charging operation, switch period.
off the charger B before disconnecting the
cables from the battery A.
197
Before disconnecting the battery: Reconnecting the (+) terminal Referring to the corresponding section, you
F close all openings (doors, boot, windows), must yourself initialise or reset certain systems,
F switch off all electrical consumers (audio such as:
system, wipers, lighting, etc.), - the remote control or electronic key
F switch off the ignition and wait for four (depending on version),
minutes. - the electric windows,
At the battery, it is only necessary to - the date and time,
disconnect the (+) terminal. - the radio preset stations.
The Stop & Start system may not be

operational during the trip following the
Quick-release terminal clamp first engine start.
F Raise lever A fully. In this case, the system will only be
Disconnecting the (+) terminal F Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal. available again after a continuous
F Push clamp B fully down. period of immobilisation of the vehicle,
F Lower lever A to lock clamp B. a period which depends on the exterior
temperature and the state of charge of the
battery (up to about 8 hours).
Do not force the lever as locking will not

be possible if the clamp is not positioned
correctly; start the procedure again.
F Raise the lever A fully to release the Following reconnection of the battery
clamp B.
F Remove the clamp B by lifting it off. Following reconnection of the battery, turn on
the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting
the engine, in order to enable the electronic
systems to initialise.
However, if minor problems persist following
this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
198
Towing General recommendations Towing your vehicle

Observe the legislation in force in your
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for
country.
towing another vehicle using the towing eye.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
Access to the tools The driver must remain at the wheel of
the towed vehicle and must have a valid
driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, always use an
approved towing arm; rope and straps are
prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
F On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
pressing on its left side.
off, there is no more braking and steering
F Screw the towing eye completely.
assistance.
F Install the towing bar.
In the following cases, you must always
F Move the gear lever into neutral (position N
call on a professional recovery service:
The towing eye is installed in the boot under for an automatic gearbox).
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
the floor. fast road,
To gain access to them: - four-wheel drive vehicle,
F open the boot, - when it is not possible to put the
F lift the floor and remove it, gearbox into neutral, unlock the Failure to follow this instruction may cause
F remove the towing eye from the holder.
8
steering, or release the parking brake, damage to some components (braking,
- towing with only two wheels on the transmission, etc.) and the absence of
ground, braking assistance when the engine is
- where there is no approved tow bar restarted.
available etc.
F Unlock the steering by turning the key in
the ignition by one notch and release the
parking brake.
199
F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on

both vehicles.
F Set off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
Towing another vehicle
F On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by

pressing at the bottom.
F Screw the towing eye completely.
F Install the towing bar.
F Switch on the hazard warning lamp on both
vehicles.
F Set off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
200
Technical data
The GTW values and the towable loads

Characteristics of engines listed are valid for a maximum altitude of
If the ambient temperature is high, it is
and towed loads 1,000 metres. The towable load must be
recommended that the engine be allowed
to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the vehicle
reduced by steps of 10% for each additional
comes to a stop, to facilitate its cooling.
1,000 metres.
Engines The recommended nose weight is the vertical
load on the towbar ball (removable, with or
The engine specifications (displacement, max. without tools).
power, max. speed, energy, CO2 emissions,
etc.) associated with your vehicle are
mentioned in the registration certificate, and in GTW: Gross train weight.
the commercial documents.
These characteristics correspond to the values
type-approved on a test bed, under conditions High ambient temperatures may result
defined in European legislation in a reduction in the performance of the
(Directive 1999/99/EC). vehicle to protect the engine. When the
For more information, contact a CITROËN exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
dealer or a qualified workshop. limit the towed weight.
Weights and towed loads Towing using a lightly loaded vehicle can
adversely affect roadholding.
Braking distances are increased when
The maximum weights and towed loads for towing a trailer.
your vehicle are given in the registration When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
document, as well as in sales brochures. a speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) (observe
the local legislation in force).
9
These values are also given on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN
201
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – PETROL

PureTech PureTech
Engine PureTech 110 S&S VTI 115 EAT6
68 BVM 82 BVM
Automatic Automatic
Manual 5-speed Manual 5-speed Manual 5-speed
Gearboxes 6-speed 6-speed
(BVM5) (BVM5) (BVM5)
(EAT6) (EAT6)
EB2DT – AT6III
EB2DT – BE – – STTd
Code EB2FB – MA EB2F – MA EC5F – AT6III
STTd EB2DTM – AT6III
– STTd
SXHMZ6/…
Model codes B0 – B1 – A0 –
SXHMP6/B0 – SXHNZT/A0S
Wheel 640 = /A... B0M – A0M SXHNZ6/A0S SXNFPT/A0
SXHMP6/A0 SXHNVT/A0S
Wheel 620 = /B… – A0G – A1G –
B0G – B1G
Cylinders volume (cm3) 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,199 1,587
Max power: EU standard (kW) 50 60 81 81 85
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 10 or

450 450 600 450 450
12% slope (kg)
Unbraked trailer (kg) 450 450 450 450 450
Recommended nose weight (kg) 46 46 46 46 46
202
Technical data
Engines and towed loads – DIESEL

Engine BlueHDi 75 S&S BVM HDI 90 BlueHDi 100 S&S BVM
Manual 5-speed Manual 5-speed Manual 5-speed

Gearboxes
(BVM5) (BVM5) (BVM5)
Code DV6FE – BE – STTd DV6DM – BE DV6FD – BE – STTd
Model codes
SXBHW6/…
Wheel 640 = /A... SX9HJC/B0 – SX9HJC/A0 SXBHY6/B0S – SXBHY6/A0S
B0S – B1S – A0S
Wheel 620 = /B…
Cylinders volume (cm3) 1,560 1,560 1,560
Max power: EU standard (kW) 55 66 73
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) on a 10 or

600 600 600
12% slope (kg)
Unbraked trailer (kg) 450 450 450
Recommended nose weight (kg) 46 46 46
9
203
Technical data
Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an
unladen vehicle.
* Mirrors folded in.

204
Technical data
Identification markings A. Vehicle identification number (VIN),

under the bonnet.
It also indicates the paint colour code.
Different visible markings for the identification The number is engraved on the body structure.
and localisation of your vehicle.
B. Vehicle identification number (VIN), on The vehicle may be originally equipped
the dashboard. with tyres with higher load and speed
The number is on a label, visible through the indices than those indicated on the label,
windscreen. without affecting inflation pressure.
C. Manufacturer's label.
This tamperproof label is affixed to the right-
hand door. Checking tyre pressures
It bears the following information: The tyre pressures should be checked when
- the name of the manufacturer, cold at least monthly.
- the European Whole Vehicle Type Approval The pressures given on the label are valid for
number, cold tyres. If you have driven for more than
- the vehicle identification number (VIN), 10 minutes or more than 6 miles (10 kilometres)
- the maximum authorised vehicle weight (the at more than 30 mph (50 km/h), the tyres will be
Gross Vehicle Weight or GVW), warm; in this case 0.3 bar (30 kPa) should be
- the maximum authorised vehicle + trailer added to the pressures given on the label.
weight (the Gross Train Weight or GTW),
- the maximum weight on the front axle,
- the maximum weight on the rear axle.
Never reduce the pressure of a warm tyre.
D. Tyres / paint code label.
This label is affixed to the driver's door
aperture.
It bears the following information about the
tyres: Low tyre pressures increase fuel
9
- the tyre pressures, unladen and laden, consumption.
- the tyre specification, made up of the
dimensions and type as well as the load and
speed indices,
- the spare tyre pressure.
205
Technical data
206
CITROËN Connect Nav The different functions and settings

described vary according to the version
and configuration of your vehicle.
As a safety measure and because it

requires sustained attention by the
driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free
system of your audio system must be
done with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that

it will only operate in your vehicle.
GPS satellite navigation – Contents The display of the Energy Economy
Mode message signals that a change to
Applications – Multimedia First steps 2
standby is imminent.
Steering mounted controls 3
audio – Bluetooth® Menus 4
telephone Voice commands 5
Navigation 11
Connected navigation 15 The link below gives access to OSS (Open
Applications 18 Source Software) codes for the system.
Radio 23 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 25 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
Media 26
.
Telephone 28
Configuration 33
Frequently asked questions 37
1
First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive" 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
type.
With the engine running, a press
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
mutes the sound.
abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with no
With the ignition off, a press turns
additional product.
the system on.
Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
Adjustment of the volume. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Use the buttons either side of or below the Certain information is displayed permanently in Selecting the audio source (depending on
touch screen for access to the menus, then the upper band of the touch screen: version):
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. - Repeat of the air conditioning information - FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations.
(depending on version), and direct access to - Key USB.
- CD Player (depending on model).
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or the corresponding menu.
- Media player connected via the auxiliary
"Menu" buttons either side of the touch screen - Go directly to the selection of the audio
socket (depending on model).
for access to the menus, then press the virtual source, to the list of radio stations (or list of - Telephone connected via Bluetooth
buttons in the touch screen. titles depending on the source). and multimedia broadcast Bluetooth*
- Go to the message notifications, emails, (streaming).
map updates and, depending on the
You can display the menu at any time by services, the navigation notifications.
pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. - Go to the settings for the touch screen and
the digital instrument panel.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.

Press the cross to go back a level.
Press "OK" to confirm.
2
In the "Settings" menu you can create Steering mounted controls Media (short press): change the
multimedia source.
a profile for just one person or a group
Depending on model. Telephone (short press): start
of people with common points, with the
telephone call.
possibility of entering a multitude of Voice commands: or
Call in progress (short press):
settings (radio presets, audio settings, This control is located on the
access telephone menu.
navigation history, contact favourites, steering wheel or at the end of the
Telephone (long press): reject an
etc.); these settings are taken into account lighting control stalk (depending on
incoming call, end call; when no call
automatically. model).
is in progress, access telephone
Short press, system voice
menu.
commands.
Long press, smartphone voice
commands via the system.
In very hot conditions, the volume may Radio (rotate): automatic search for
be limited to protect the system. It may go Increase volume. the previous / next station.
into standby (screen and sound off) for at Media (rotate): previous / next track,
least 5 minutes or move in a list.
or
The return to normal takes place when Short press: confirm a selection; if
the temperature in the passenger nothing selected, access to presets.
compartment has dropped.
Mute / Restore the sound.
Or
Mute by pressing the volume
or increase and decrease buttons
simultaneously. Radio: display the list of stations.
Restore the sound by pressing one Media: display the list of tracks.
of the two volume buttons. Radio (press and hold): update the
list of stations received.
Decrease volume.
or
.
3
Menus 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Radio Media

Depending on model / Depending on version Select an audio source, a radio
station, display photographs.
Air conditioning
or
Manage the different temperature
and air flow settings.
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13

23 °C 12:13
FM/87.5 MHz
Applications 87.5MHz
18,5 21,5 Operate certain applications on a

smartphone connected via CarPlay®,
MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto.
or
Check the state of the Bluetooth® and
Wi-Fi connections.
Connected navigation 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
Enter navigation settings and

choose a destination.
Use services available in real time,
or
depending on equipment.
4
Telephone 23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 Voice commands

Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®,
read messages and emails and send Steering mounted controls
quick messages.
or Pressing this button activates the
voice commands function.
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13
To ensure that voice commands are

always recognised by the system, please
Vehicle observe the following recommendations:
Activate, deactivate or configure - speak in a normal tone without
certain vehicle functions. breaking up words or raising your
voice.
or - always wait for the "beep" (audible
signal) before speaking.
- for best operation, it is recommended
Configuration that the windows and opening roof
23 °C 18,5 21,5 12:13 be closed to avoid extraneous
Configure a personal profile and/ interference (according to version),
or configure the sound (balance, - before making a voice command, ask
ambience, etc.) and the display other passengers to not speak.
or
(language, units, date, time, etc.).
.
5
First steps Information – Using the system Global voice commands

Example of a "voice command" for
Press the Push To Talk button
navigation:
and tell me what you'd like These commands can be made from any
"Navigate to address", "11 Regent
after the tone. Remember you screen page after pressing the "Voice
Street, London".
can interrupt me at any time command" or "Telephone" button located
by pressing this button. If you on the steering wheel, as long as there is
the radio and media:
press it again while I'm waiting no telephone call in progress.
"Play artist", "Madonna".
for you to speak, it'll end the
conversation. If you need to
the telephone:
start over, say "cancel". If you
"Call David Miller".
want to undo something, say
"undo". And to get information
and tips at any time, just say
The voice commands, with a choice of "help". If you ask to me do
12 languages (English, French, Italian, something and there's some
Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese, information missing that I need,
Polish, Turkish, Russian, Arabic, I'll give you some examples
Brazilian), are made using the language or take you through it step by
previously chosen and set in the system. step. There's more information
For some voice commands, there are available in "novice" mode.
alternative synonyms. You can set the dialogue mode
Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to /... to "expert" when you feel
The voice commands in Arabic for: comfortable.
"Navigate to address" and "Display POI in
the city", are not available.
6
Voice commands Help messages "Navigation" voice

commands
Help There are lots of topics I can help you with. These commands can be made from any
You can say: "help with phone", "help with screen page after pressing the "Voice
Voice command help navigation", "help with media" or "help with command" or "Telephone" button located
radio". For an overview on how to use voice on the steering wheel, as long as there is
Navigation help controls, you can say "help with voice controls". no telephone call in progress.
Radio help
Media help
Telephone help
Set dialogue mode as <...> Choose "beginner" or "expert" mode.
Select profile <...> Select profile 1, 2 or 3.
Yes Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no"

and we'll start that again.
No
.
7
Voice commands Help messages "Radio Media" voice

commands
These commands can be made from any
Navigate home To start guidance or add a stopover, say screen page after pressing the "Voice
"navigate to" and then the address or contact command" or "Telephone" button located
Navigate to work name. For example, "navigate to address on the steering wheel, as long as there is
11 Regent Street, London", or "navigate to no telephone call in progress.
Navigate to preferred address <...>
contact, John Miller". You can specify if it's a
Navigate to contact <...> preferred or recent destination. For example,
"navigate to preferred address, Tennis club",
Navigate to address <...> "navigate to recent destination, 11 Regent
Street, London". Otherwise, just say, "navigate
Show nearby POI <...>
home". To see points of interest on a map, you
can say things like "show hotels in Banbury"
or "show nearby petrol station". For more
information you can ask for "help with route
guidance".
Remaining distance To get information about your current route,

you can say "tell me the remaining time",
Remaining time "distance" or "arrival time". Try saying "help
with navigation" to learn more commands.
Arrival time
Stop route guidance
Depending on the country, give the

destination instructions (address) in the
language used by the system.
8
Voice commands Help messages "Telephone" voice

commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
Tune to channel <...> You can pick a radio station by saying "tune these voice commands can be issued
to" and the station name or frequency. For from any main screen page after pressing
example "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to the "Telephone" button on the steering
98.5 FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say wheel, as long as there is no telephone
"tune to preset number". For example "tune to call in progress.
preset number five". If there is no telephone connected by
Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
"Please first connect a telephone" and the
voice session will be closed.
What's playing To display the details of the current "track",

"artist" and "album", you can say "What's
playing"
Play song <...> Use the command "play" to select the type
of music you'd like to hear. You can pick by
"song", "artist", or "album". Just say something
Play artist <...> like "play artist, Madonna", "play song, Hey
Jude", or "play album, Thriller".
Play album <...>
Media voice commands are available only
.
for a USB connection.
9
Voice commands Help messages "Text message" voice

commands
If a telephone is connected to the system,
Call contact <...>* To make a phone call, say "call" followed by these voice commands can be issued
the contact name, for example: "Call David from any main screen page after pressing
Miller". You can also include the phone type, the "Telephone" button on the steering
for example: "Call David Miller at home". To wheel, as long as there is no telephone
make a call by number, say "dial" followed call in progress.
Dial <...>*
by the phone number, for example, "Dial If there is no telephone connected by
107776 835 417". You can check your voicemail Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
by saying "call voicemail". To send a text, "Please first connect a telephone" and the
say "send quick message to", followed by voice session will be closed.
Display contacts* the contact, and then the name of the quick
message you'd like to send. For example, "send
quick message to David Miller, I'll be late". To
display the list of calls, say "display calls". For
more information on SMS, you can say "help
Display calls*
with texting".
Call (message box | voicemail)*
* This function is available only if the

telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
10
Voice commands Help messages Navigation

Choice of a profile
Send text to <...> To hear your messages, you can say "listen to To a new destination
most recent message". When you want to send
a text, there's a set of quick messages ready Press Navigation to display the
for you to use. Just use the quick message primary page.
name and say something like "send quick
message to Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the or
phone menu for the names of the supported
messages.
Please say "call" or "send quick message to",
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
and then select a line from the list. To move
Listen to most recent message* secondary page.
around a list shown on the display, you can
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
"previous page". To undo your selection, say Select "Enter address".
"undo". To cancel the current action and start
again, say "cancel".
Select the "Country".
Enter the "City", the "Street"

and the "Number" and confirm
The system only sends pre-recorded
by pressing on the suggestions
"Quick messages".
displayed.
.
* This function is available only if the
telephone connected to the system supports
downloading of contacts and recent calls
and if the download has been done.
11
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance To a recent destination To "My home" or "My work"
criteria".
And / Or Press Navigation to display the Press Navigation to display the

primary page. primary page.
Select "See on map" to select the or or
"Guidance criteria".
Press "OK" to start navigation.

Press the "MENU" button to go to the Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page. secondary page.
Select "My destinations".

Zoom out / zoom in using the touch Select "My destinations".
buttons or with two fingers on the screen.
Select the "Preferred" tab.

Select the "Recent" tab.
In order to be able to use the navigation,
Select "My home".
it is necessary to fill in the "City", the
Select the address chosen in the list to display
"Street" and the "Number" on the virtual
the "Guidance criteria.
keyboard or take in the list of "Contact" or
in the "History" of addresses. Or
Press "OK" to start navigation.
Select "My work".
Without confirmation of the street number,
you will be guided to one end of the street.
Select "Position" to visualise the arrival
point geographically. Or
Select a preset favourite destination.
12
Towards a contact Towards points of interest To a point on the map

(POI)
Press Navigation to display the
Press Navigation to display the primary page.
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different
primary page.
categories. or
or Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
or Explore the map by sliding a finger on the

Press the "MENU" button to go to the screen.
secondary page.
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
Press the "MENU" button to go to the
Select "My destinations".
secondary page.
Tap the screen to place a marker
Select "Points of interest".
and display the sub-menu.
Select the "Contact" tab.
Select a contact in the list to start navigation. Press this button to start navigation.
Select the "Travel", or "leisure"
or "Commercial" or "Public" or
"Geographic" tab.
Or
Or
Press this button to save the

Select "Search" to enter the name
address displayed.
and address of a POI.
Press "OK" to start calculation of A long press on an item opens a list of
.
the route. POIs nearby.
13
Towards coordinates GPS Press this button to start navigation. TMC (Traffic Message
Channel)
primary page.
Or TMC (Traffic Message Channel)
or
messages are linked to a European
Press this button to save the standard on the broadcasting of traffic
address displayed. information via the RDS system on FM
radio, transmitting traffic information in
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the real time.
screen. The TMC information is then displayed
OR
on a GPS Navigation system map and
Press this button to display the world
taken into account straight away during
map. Press this button to enter the value
navigation, so as to avoid accidents, traffic
Using the grid, select by zoom the for "Latitude" using the virtual
jams and closed roads.
desired country or region. keypad.
And
Press this button to enter the GPS
coordinates. Press this button to enter the value The display of danger areas depends on
for "Longitude" using the virtual the legislation in force and subscription to
keypad. the service.
A marker is displayed in the middle

of the screen, with the "Latitude"
and "Longitude" coordinates.
14
Connection Bluetooth
Connected navigation For access to connected navigation, you
can use the connection provided by the
According to version Activate the Bluetooth function on
vehicle via the "Emergency or assistance
the telephone and ensure that it is
Depending on the equipment level of the call" services or use your smartphone as
visible to all (see the "Connect-App"
vehicle a modem.
section).
Activate and enter settings for sharing
the smartphone connection.
Network connection provided by
the vehicle Connection Wi-Fi
Select a Wi-Fi network found by the

system and connect to it (see the
Network connection provided by "Connect-App" section).
the vehicle
OR
The system is automatically
Network connection provided by connected to the modem included Restrictions of use:
the user for the "Emergency or assistance - With CarPlay ®, connection sharing is
calls" services and does not require only with a Wi-Fi connection.
a connection provided by the user - With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing
via their smartphone. is only with a USB connection.
The quality of services depends on the
quality of the network connection.
Network connection provided by
Connected navigation the user
connection Connection USB
On the arrival of "TOMTOM
As a safety measure and because it TRAFFIC", the services are
requires sustained attention by the driver, Connect a USB cable. available.
using a smartphone when driving is The smartphone charges when
prohibited. connected by a USB cable.
.
All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
15
Settings specific to Activate or deactivate:

The services offered with connected
- "Allow declaration of danger
navigation are as follows. connected navigation zones".
A Connected Services pack:
- "Guidance to final destination on
- Weather,
In the "Settings" menu you can create foot"
- Filling stations,
a profile for just one person or a group - "Authorize sending information"
- Car park,
of people with common points, with the These settings must be made
- Traffic,
possibility of entering a multitude of according to each profile.
- POI local search.
settings (radio presets, audio settings,
A Danger area pack (option).
navigation history, contact favourites,
etc.); these settings are taken into account Select "Alerts".
automatically.
Activate or deactivate "Warn of
The principles and standards danger zones".
are constantly changing; for the
communication process between the Press Navigation to display the
smartphone and the system to work primary page. Select this button.
correctly, we recommend that you or
update the operating system of the
smartphone as well as the date and
time of the smartphone and the Activate: Give an audible warning
system. Press the "MENU" button to go to the
secondary page.
For access to connected navigation, you

Select "Settings". have to select the option: "Authorize
sending information".
Select "Map". The display of danger areas depends on

the legislation in force and subscription to
the service.
16
Declaration of "Danger "Danger areas" pack Display the weather

areas" updates Press Navigation to display the
primary page.
Press Settings to display the
To distribute information on the
primary page. or
declaration of danger zones, you should
check the option: "Allow declaration of
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
danger zones".
secondary page.
Press this button to display the list of
Select "System settings". services.

primary page. Select "View map".
or Select the "System info" tab.
Select "Weather".
Select "View" to display the versions

Press the "Declare a new danger
of the different modules installed in Press this button to display primary
zone" button located in the upper
the system. information.
bar of the touch screen
Select "Update(s) due".

Press this button to display the
Select the option "Type" to choose
detailed weather information.
the type of "Danger area".
Select the "Speed" option and enter

it using the virtual keypad. The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will
You can download the system and map
updates from the Brand's website. be the maximum temperature for the day.
The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will
.
The update procedure can also be found
Press "OK" to save and distribute be the minimum temperature for the night.
on the website.
the information.
17
Applications Connectivity CarPlay® smartphone

connection
Press Applications to display the
Internet Browser primary page.
Press Applications to display the or As a safety measure and because it
primary page. requires sustained attention by the driver,
or using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®,
vehicle stationary.
MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Internet
Browser" function.
Press "Internet Browser" to display the The synchronisation of a personal

browser home page. smartphone allows users to display
Applications applications adapted for the smartphone's
Select your country of residence. CarPlay ® technology on the vehicle screen
primary page. when the smartphone's CarPlay ® function
has been previously activated.
or
As the principles and standards are
Press "OK" to save and start the
constantly changing, it is recommended
browser.
that you keep your smartphone's
operating system updated.
Press "Applications" to display the For the list of eligible smartphones, go
applications home page. to the Brand's internet website in your
Connection to the internet is via one of country.
the network connections provided by the
vehicle or the user.
Connect a USB cable. The

smartphone charges when
connected by a USB cable.
18
Press on "Telephone" to display the MirrorLinkTM smartphone As a safety measure, applications can
CarPlay ® interface.
connection only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
or display is interrupted once the vehicle is
moving.
requires sustained attention by the driver,
Or using a smartphone when driving is
prohibited. The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires
Connect a USB cable. The All operations must be done with the the use of a compatible smartphone and
smartphone charges when vehicle stationary. applications.
When connecting a smartphone

The synchronisation of a personal to the system, it is recommended
From the system, press
smartphone allows users to display that Bluetooth® be started on the
"Applications" to display the
applications adapted for the smartphone's smartphone
or primary page.
MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle
screen. Connect a USB cable. The
The principles and standards smartphone charges when
are constantly changing, for the connected by a USB cable.
Press "Connectivity" to go to the CarPlay ®
communication process between the
function. From the system, press
smartphone and the system to operate,
it is essential that the smartphone is "Applications" to display the
Press on "CarPlay" to display the primary page.
CarPlay ® interface. unlocked; update the operating system of or
the smartphone as well as the date and
time of the smartphone and the system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your Press "Connectivity" to go to the MirrorLinkTM
country. function.
On connecting the USB cable, the Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
.
CarPlay ® function deactivates the application in the system.
system's Bluetooth® mode.
19
Depending on the smartphone, it may be Smartphone connection As a safety measure, applications can
necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM "
function.
Android Auto only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
display is interrupted once the vehicle is
During the procedure, several
moving.
screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the The "Android Auto" function requires
using a smartphone when driving is
connection. the use of a compatible smartphone and
prohibited.
applications.
Once connection is established, a page vehicle stationary.
is displayed with the applications already Connect a USB cable. The
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted smartphone charges when
to MirrorLinkTM technology. connected by a USB cable.
The synchronisation of a personal
Access to the different audio sources remains smartphone allows users to display From the system, press
accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM applications adapted for the smartphone's "Applications" to display the
display, using touch buttons in the upper bar. Android Auto technology on the vehicle primary page.
Access to the menus for the system is possible screen. or
at any time using the dedicated buttons. The principles and standards
are constantly changing, for the
it is essential that the smartphone is Press "Connectivity" to go to the "Android
unlocked; update the operating system Auto" function.
There may be a wait for the availability of
applications, depending on the quality of of the smartphone as well as the date
Press "Android Auto" to start the
your network. and time of the smartphone and the
application in the system.
system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your During the procedure, several
country. screen pages relating to certain
functions are displayed.
Accept to start and complete the
connection.
20
Different audio sources remain accessible in Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
the margin of the Android Auto display, using secondary page.
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
touch buttons in the upper bar.
all" (telephone configuration). Press "Bluetooth connection".
Access to the menus for the system is possible
at any time using the dedicated buttons.
Procedure from the telephone

Select "Search".
Select the system name in the list of
In Android Auto mode, the function to The list of telephones detected is
devices detected.
display the menu by pressing the screen displayed.
briefly with three fingers, is deactivated.
In the system, accept the connection request If the pairing procedure fails, it is
from the telephone. recommended that you deactivate and
then reactivate the Bluetooth function in
There may be a waiting time for the To complete the pairing, whichever your telephone.
availability of applications, depending on procedure used (from the telephone or
the quality of your network. from the system), ensure that the code Select the name of the chosen
is the same in the system and in the telephone in the list.
telephone.
Bluetooth connection®
Procedure from the system Depending on the type of telephone, you
As a safety measure and because they may be asked to accept or not the transfer
require prolonged attention on the part Press Connect-App to display the of your contacts and messages.
of the driver, the operations for pairing primary page.
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your or
audio system must be carried out with the
.
vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
21
Connection sharing Connection Wi-Fi The Wi-Fi connection and the sharing of
the Wi-Fi connection are exclusive.
The system offers to connect the telephone Network connection by the smartphone Wi-Fi.
with 3 profiles:
Press Connect-App to display the
- "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
primary page.
only),
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
or
Connection sharing Wi-Fi
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Mobile internet data". Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the
system.
Press Connect-App to display the

The "Mobile internet data" profile Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the primary page.
must be activated for connected secondary page.
navigation (where the vehicle does not or
have "Emergency and assistance call" Select "Wi-Fi network
services), having first activated sharing of connection".
this connection on your smartphone.
Select the "Secured" or "Not Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

secured" or "Stored" tab. secondary page.
Select one or more profiles.
Select "Share Wi-Fi connection".
Select a network.

Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
Using the virtual keypad, enter the deactivate sharing of the Wi-Fi connection.
"Key" for the Wi-Fi network and the
And / Or
"Password".
Select the "Settings" to change the name of

Press "OK" to start the connection.
the system network and the password.
22
Press "OK" to confirm. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the

Radio secondary page.
Selecting a station Select "Radio stations" in the

secondary page.
To protect against unauthorised access Press Radio Media to display the
and make your systems as secure as primary page.
possible, the use of a complex security
or Press "Frequency".
code or password is recommended.
Enter the values using the virtual
keypad.
First enter the units then click on the
decimals zone to enter the figures
Manage connections Press "Frequency". after the decimal point.
Press Connect-App to display the Press one of the buttons for an

primary page. automatic search for radio stations.
or
Or
Move the cursor for a manual search Radio reception may be affected by the
for frequencies up or down. use of electrical equipment not approved
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the connected to the 12 V socket.
secondary page. The external environment (hills, buildings,
Select "Manage connection". Or tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
block reception, including in RDS mode.
Press Radio Media to display the
This is a normal effect of the way in
primary page.
which radio waves are transmitted and
With this function you can view the access does not indicate any failure of the audio
or
.
to connected services, the availability of equipment.
connected services and modify the connection
mode.
23
Presetting a station Press "OK" to confirm. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Select a radio station or frequency.
(refer to the corresponding section) Select "Radio settings".
Press "Presets". RDS, if activated, allows you to continue

listening to the same station by automatic
Make a long press on one of the retuning to alternative frequencies.
buttons to preset the station. Select "General".
However, in certain conditions, coverage
of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio Activate / Deactivate "Display radio
Activating / Deactivating stations do not cover 100% of the territory. text".
This explains the loss of reception of the
RDS station during a journey.
primary page.
or Display text information
The "Radio Text" function allows

information transmitted by the radio
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the station and related to the station or the
secondary page. song playing to be displayed.
Select "Radio settings".

primary page.
Select "General".
or
Activate / Deactivate "Station
follow".
24
Play TA messages DAB (Digital Audio DAB-FM auto tracking

Broadcasting) radio
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function "DAB" does not cover 100% of the
gives priority to TA alert messages.
Terrestrial Digital Radio territory.
To operate, this function needs good When the digital radio signal is poor,
reception of a radio station that carries "DAB-FM auto tracking" allows you to
Digital radio provides higher quality
this type of message. While traffic continue listening to the same station,
reception.
information is being broadcast, the current by automatically switching to the
The different multiplexes offer a choice
media is automatically interrupted so that corresponding FM analogue station (if
of radio stations arranged in alphabetical
the TA message can be heard. Normal there is one).
order.
play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Press Radio Media to display the Press Radio Media to display the
or or
Select "Announcements".
Activate / Deactivate "Traffic

announcement".
Select the audio source. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Radio settings".
Press "Band" to select the "DAB" waveband.
Select "General".
.
25
Activate / Deactivate "Station Socket Auxiliary (AUX)

follow".
Media
(depending on model / depending on
Port USB equipment)
Press "OK".
If "DAB-FM auto tracking" is activated,

there is a difference of a few seconds
when the system switches to FM analogue
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
radio with sometimes a variation in
Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or has been checked in the audio settings.
volume.
connect the USB device to the USB port using
Once the digital signal quality is restored,
a suitable cable (not supplied).
the system automatically changes back
to "DAB". Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc:)
To protect the system, do not use a USB to the auxiliary jack socket using an audio
hub. cable (not supplied).
If the "DAB" station being listened to is First adjust the volume on your portable device
not available on "FM" ("DAB-FM" option The system builds playlists (in temporary (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
greyed out), or "DAB/FM auto tracking " is memory), an operation which can take from audio system.
not activated, the sound will cut out while a few seconds to several minutes at the first Display and management of the controls are
the digital signal is too weak. connection. via the portable device.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick CD player
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they
(depending on model / depending on
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
equipment)
will be shorter.
Insert the CD in the player.
26
Selecting the source Once connected in streaming mode, the Information and advice
telephone is considered to be a media
Press Radio Media to display the source. The system supports USB mass storage
primary page.
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
players via USB ports. The adapter cable
or
is not supplied.
Connecting Apple® players Device management is done by the audio
system controls.
Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port Other peripherals, not recognised on
Select "Source". using a suitable cable (not supplied). connection, must be connected to the
Play starts automatically. auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
Control is via the audio system. depending on compatibility.
Choose the source.
The classifications available are those of

® the portable device connected (artists /
Bluetooth audio streaming albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
To protect the system, do not use a USB
Streaming allows you to listen to music from podcasts).
hub.
your smartphone. The default classification used is by
artists. To modify the classification used,
The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first return to the first level of the menu then
adjust the volume on your portable device (to a select the desired classification (playlists The audio equipment will only play audio files
high level). for example) and confirm to go down with ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
Then adjust the volume of your audio system. through the menu to the desired track. file extensions and with a bit rate of between
32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
If play does not start automatically, it may be It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
necessary to start the audio playback from the No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
telephone. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma
.
Control is from the portable device or by using The version of software in the audio system 9 type.
the system's touch buttons. may not be compatible with the generation of The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and
your Apple ® player. 48 kHz.
27
It is advisable to restrict file names to

20 characters, without using special characters
Telephone To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or
(e.g.: " " ? .; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
display problems.
Pairing a Bluetooth® from the system), ensure that the code
telephone is the same in the system and in the
telephone.
Use only USB keys in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table). As a safety measure and because it
It is recommended that the original USB Procedure from the system
cable for the portable device is used. system of your audio system must be
Press "Telephone" to display the
primary page.
ignition on.
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or or
Joliet if possible when burning the CD.
If the disc is burned in another format, it may
not be played correctly. Activate the Bluetooth function on the
It is recommended that the same burning telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
Press "Bluetooth search".
standard is always used on an individual disc, all" (telephone configuration).
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Procedure from the telephone Or
Joliet standard is recommended.
Select the system name in the list of Select "Search".

devices detected. The list of telephones detected is
displayed.
In the system, accept the connection request If the pairing procedure fails, it is
from the telephone. recommended that you deactivate and
then reactivate the Bluetooth function in
your telephone.
28
Select the name of the chosen Automatic reconnection Select one or more profiles.
telephone in the list.
On return to the vehicle, if the last

telephone connected is present again, it is
Connection sharing automatically recognised and within about
30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
The system offers to connect the telephone
the connection is established without any
with 3 profiles:
action on your part (Bluetooth activated).
only), The ability of the system to connect to just
- "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of one profile depends on the telephone.
the audio files on the telephone), All three profiles may connect by default.
- "Mobile internet data". To modify the connection profile:

Activation of the profile; "Mobile internet primary page.
data" is obligatory for connected The services available depend on
navigation having first activated sharing of or the network, the SIM card and the
this connection on your smartphone. compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used. Check the instructions for your
telephone and with your service provider
for the services to which you have access.
Select one or more profiles. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
The profiles compatible with the system

Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Bluetooth connection" to are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
display the list of paired devices. MAP and PAN.
Depending on the type of telephone, you Press the "details" button. Go to the Brand's website for more information
.
may be asked to accept or not the transfer (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
of your contacts and messages.
29
Managing paired telephones Deleting a telephone Making a call

Select the basket at top right of the
Using the telephone is not recommended
This function allows the connection or screen to display a basket alongside
while driving.
disconnection of a peripheral device as the telephone chosen.
Park the vehicle.
well as the deletion of a pairing.
Make the call using the steering mounted
controls.
Press the basket alongside the
telephone chosen to delete it.
primary page.
or Receiving a call Calling a new number

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering primary page.
mounted TEL button to accept an
secondary page. or
incoming call.
And
Select "Bluetooth connection" to
display the list of paired devices. Make a long press
Enter the phone number using the
digital keypad.
Press on the name of the telephone
on the steering mounted TEL button
chosen in the list to disconnect it.
to reject the call. Press "Call" to start the call.
Press again to connect it.
or
Select "End call".
30
Calling a contact Calling a recently used Managing contacts / entries

number
primary page. Press "Telephone" to display the
or
or or
Or make a long press

Or Select "Contact".
Make a long press Select "Create" to add a new

on the steering mounted TEL button.
contact.
on the steering mounted button. In the "Telephone" tab, enter the telephone
Select "Contact". numbers for the contact.
Select the desired contact from the list offered. In the "Address" tab, enter the addresses for
the contact.
Select "Calls".
Select "Call". In the "Email" tab, enter the email addresses
Select the desired contact from the list offered. for the contact.
The "Email" function allows email

It is always possible to make a call directly addresses to be entered for a contact, but
from the telephone; as a safety measure, the system is not able to send emails.
.
first park the vehicle.
31
Managing messages Press "Call" to start the call. Managing quick messages
primary page. Press "Telephone" to display the
Press " Play" to hear the message. primary page.
or
or
Access to "Messages" depends on the

Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the compatibility of the smartphone and the
secondary page. integral system. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
Depending on the smartphone, access to secondary page.
Select "Messages" to display the list your messages or email may be slow.
of messages.
The services available depend on Select "Quick messages" to display

Select the "All" or "Sent" or the network, the SIM card and the the list of messages.
"Incoming" tab. compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
used.
Check in the manual for your smartphone
and with your service provider for the
Select the detail of the message Select the "Delayed" or "My arrival"
services available to you.
chosen in one of the lists. or "Not available" or "Other" tab
with the possibility of creating new
messages.
Press "Answer" to send a quick
message stored in the system.
32
Press "Create" to write a new

message.
Select "Email" to display the list of
messages.
Configuration
Audio settings
Select the message chosen in one Select the "Incoming" or "Sent" or
of the lists. "Not read" tab.
primary page.
or
Press "Transfer" to select the Select the message chosen in one of the lists.
addressee(s).
Press "Play" to start playing the

message. Select "Audio settings".
Press " Play" to start playing the
message.
Access to "Email" depends on the

compatibility of the smartphone and the
Select "Ambience".
integral system.
Managing email Or
"Position".
primary page. Or
"Sound".
or
Or
"Voice".
Or
"Ringtone".
.
secondary page. Press "OK" to save the settings.
33
Profile settings Press "OK" to confirm.

The sound distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys© system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the
sound to be adapted according to the As a safety measure and because it
number of passengers in the vehicle. requires the sustained attention of the Press this button to add a
Available only with the front and rear driver, changes to settings must only be photograph to the profile.
speakers configuration. done with the vehicle stationary.
Insert a USB memory stick

Press Settings to display the containing the photograph in the
The audio settings Ambience (6 optional primary page. USB port.
ambiences) and Bass, Medium and
Select the photograph.
Treble are different and independent for or
each audio source. Press "OK" to accept the transfer of
Activate or Deactivate "Loudness". the photograph.
The settings for "Position" (All
passengers, Driver and Front only) are
common to all sources. Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press "OK" again to save the
Activate or Deactivate "Touch tones", secondary page. settings.
"Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary
input". Select "Setting of the profiles".
The location for the photograph is

square; the system reshapes the original
Onboard audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3" photograph if in another format.
optimises the distribution of sound in the or "Common profile".
passenger compartment.
Press this button to enter a name for
the profile using the virtual keypad.
Press this button to initialise the
profile selected.
34
Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the

Initialisation of the profile selected
primary page.
activates the English language by default.
Press Settings to display the or

primary page.
Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to associate the
"Audio settings" with it. or
Select "Audio settings". Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Select "System settings".

Select "Ambience". secondary page.
Or Select "Screen configuration".

Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
"Position". fuel consumption and temperature.
Or Select "Animation". Select "Factory settings" to return to the initial

settings.
"Sound". Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
scrolling".
Or Returning the system to factory settings
activates the English language by default.
"Voice". Select "Brightness".
Or Move the cursor to adjust the

brightness of the screen and/or of Select "System info" to display the versions of
"Ringtone". the instrument panel. the different modules installed in the system.
.
Press "OK" to save the settings.
35
Select the language Select "Setting the time-date". Setting the time
Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the
Select "Date".
or or
Press on this button to define the
date.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page. secondary page.
Select "Languages" to change the Select "Setting the time-date".

language.
Select the display format of the date.
Select "Time".
Setting the date
Press this button to adjust the time
Press Settings to display the Adjustment of the time and date is only using the virtual keypad.
primary page. available if "GPS synchronisation" is
deactivated.
or The change between winter and summer
time is done by changing the time zone. Press "OK" to confirm.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Press this button to define the time
secondary page. zone.
36
Select the display format for the time Select "Colour schemes".
(12h / 24h).
Frequently asked
questions
The following information groups together the
Activate or deactivate Select a colour scheme in the list answers to the most frequently asked questions
synchronisation with GPS (UTC). then press "OK" to confirm. concerning your audio system.
Press "OK" to confirm. Every time the colour scheme is changed,

the system restarts, temporarily displaying
a black screen.
The system does not automatically

manage the change between winter and
summer time (depending on country).
Colour schemes
As a safety measure, the procedure
for changing the colour scheme is only
possible when the vehicle is stationary.

primary page.
.
or
37
Navigation
QUESTION RESPONSE SOLUTION
The route calculation is not The guidance criteria may be in conflict with the current Check the route settings in the "Navigation" menu.
successful. location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll road).
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The audible warning of "Danger The audible warning is not active or the volume is too Activate the audible warning in the "Navigation" menu
areas" does not work. low. and check the voice volume in the audio settings.
The system does not suggest The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC Select setting for the "Traffic info" function in the list of
a detour around an incident on messages. route settings (Without, Manual or Automatic).
the route.
I receive a "Danger area" alert Other than guidance, the system announces all Zoom in on the map to see the exact position of the
which is not on my route. "Danger areas" positioned in a cone located in front of "Danger area". Select "On the route" to no longer
the vehicle. It may provide an alert for "Danger areas" receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to
located on nearby or parallel roads. reduce the time for the announcement.
Certain traffic jams along the On starting, it is several minutes before the system Wait until the traffic information is being received correctly
route are not indicated in real begins to receive the traffic information. (display of the traffic information icons on the map).
time.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, etc.) This is perfectly normal. The system is dependent on
are listed for the traffic information. the traffic information available.
The altitude is not displayed. On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to Wait until the system has started up completely so that
3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly. there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, This behaviour is normal. The system is dependent on
etc.) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the the GPS signal reception conditions.
GPS signal may vary.
My navigation is no longer During start-up and in certain geographical areas, the Check that the connected services are activated
connected. connection may be unavailable. (settings, contract).
38
Radio
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the short-cut menu to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) block reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for Have the aerial checked by a franchised dealer.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not picked or has changed its Press on the "Update list" button in the "Radio
stations received. name in the list. stations" secondary menu.
The name of the radio station changes. Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
.
39
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
not contain audio files or contains audio files of right way up.
a format not recognised by the audio system. Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
The CD has been recorded in a format that is be played if it is too badly damaged.
not compatible with the player (udf, etc.). Check the content in the case of a recorded CD:
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system consult the advice in the "AUDIO" section.
not recognised by the audio system. The audio system CD does not read DVDs.
Due to insufficient quality, certain burned CDs
will not be read by the audio system.
There is a long waiting period following the Upon insertion of a new key, the system reads This is perfectly normal.
insertion of a CD or connection of a USB a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist,
memory stick. etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a few
minutes.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
unsuitable. selecting an ambience.
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically To start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer
displayed on the audio streaming screen. of this information.
40
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be visible. switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible
to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your
the system. telephone at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and the Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
telephone call. reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, etc.).
Some contacts are duplicated in the list. The options for synchronizing contacts are Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the telephone contacts".
contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronizations are selected, some contacts
may be duplicated.
The contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings.
Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
be transferred in a specific order.
The system does not receive SMS. The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending
SMS text messages to the system.
.
41
Settings
In changing the setting of treble and bass the The selection of an equalizer setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings
equalizer setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice-versa. to obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing the equalizer setting, the treble
and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, distribution The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
is deselected. the balance settings and vice-versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different the sources listened to. It is recommended that
sound sources, which can generate audible the audio settings (Bass:, Treble:, Balance)
differences when changing source. be adjusted to the middle position, select the
"None" musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When the engine is off, the system stops after When the engine is switched off, the system's Turn the ignition on to increase the charge of
several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge the battery.
of the battery.
In normal off state, the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode to maintain an
adequate charge in the battery.
The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting.
if the synchronisation with the satellites is Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS
deactivated. synchronisation" (UTC).
42
.
43
44
.
45
CITROËN Connect Radio The different functions and settings


ignition on.
The system is protected in such a way that

it will only operate in your vehicle.
The display of the Energy Economy
Multimedia audio system – Contents Mode message signals that a change to
standby is imminent.
Applications – Bluetooth® First steps 2
telephone Steering mounted controls 3
Menus 4
Applications 6
Radio 7 The link below gives access to OSS (Open
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 9 Source Software) codes for the system.
Media 10 https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/
Telephone 12 https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
Configuration 18
.
Frequently asked questions 21
1
Selecting the audio source (depending on

First steps The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
version):
type.
- FM/DAB*/AM* radio stations.
With the engine running, a press To clean the screen, use a soft, non-
- Telephone connected via Bluetooth
mutes the sound. abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) with no
and multimedia broadcast Bluetooth*
With the ignition off, a press turns additional product.
(streaming).
the system on. Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
- CD player (depending on model).
Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
- USB key.
Adjustment of the volume. - Media player connected via the auxiliary
socket (depending on model).
Use the buttons either side of or below the Certain information is displayed permanently in
touch screen for access to the menus, then the upper band of the touch screen:
press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. - Repeat of the air conditioning information
(depending on version), and direct access to
the corresponding menu.
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or - Reminder of the Radio Media and
"Menu" buttons either side of the touch screen Telephone menu information.
for access to the menus, then press the virtual - Access to the Settings of the touch screen
buttons in the touch screen. and digital instrument panel.
You can display the menu at any time by

pressing the screen briefly with three fingers. In the "Settings" menu you can create
a profile for just one person or a group
of people with common points, with the
All of the touch areas of the screen are white. possibility of entering a multitude of
Press in the grey zone to go back a level or settings (radio presets, audio settings,
confirm. ambiences, etc.); these settings are taken
Press the back arrow to go back a level or into account automatically.
confirm.
2
Confirm a selection.
In very hot conditions, the volume may Steering mounted controls
be limited to protect the system. It may go
into standby (screen and sound off) for at Steering mounted
least 5 minutes controls – Type 1 Increase volume.
The return to normal takes place when
the temperature in the passenger
compartment has dropped. Decrease volume.
Radio:
Select the previous / next preset
radio station. Mute / Restore sound by
Select the previous / next item in a simultaneously pressing the
menu or a list. increase and decrease volume
Media: buttons.
Select the previous / next track.
Select the previous / next item in a
menu or a list.
Steering mounted
controls – Type 2
Radio:
Short press: display the list of radio
stations.
Long press: update the list.
Media: Depending on model.
Short press: display the list of
folders. Voice commands:
Long press: display the available This control is located on the
sorting options. steering wheel or at the end of the
lighting control stalk (depending on
.
Change audio source (radio; USB; model).
AUX if equipment connected; CD; Short press, smartphone voice
streaming). commands via the system.
3
Increase volume. Radio (rotate): previous / next

preset.
Menus
Media (rotate): previous / next track, Depending on model / Depending on version
or or move in a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if Air conditioning
nothing selected, access to presets.
Manage the different temperature
Mute / Restore the sound. and air flow settings.
Or
Mute by pressing the volume
or increase and decrease buttons Radio: display the list of stations.
simultaneously. Media: display the list of tracks.
Restore the sound by pressing one Radio (press and hold): update the
of the two volume buttons. list of stations received.
18,5 21,5
Decrease volume.
or
Media (short press): change the

multimedia source.
Telephone (short press): start
or telephone call.
Call in progress (short press):
access telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an
incoming call, end call; when no call
is in progress, access telephone
menu.
4
Applications Telephone Settings

Access configurable equipment.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®. Configure a personal profile and/
Operate certain applications on or configure the sound (balance,
a smartphone connected via ambience, etc.) and the display
MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay ® or Android (language, units, date, time, etc.).
Auto.
Radio Media Driving

Select an audio source or radio
Activate, deactivate or configure
station.
certain vehicle functions.
.
5
Navigation Press the back arrow to go back a

Applications level.
Configure the guidance and select Viewing photos

your destination via MirrorLinkTM,
CarPlay ® or Android Auto. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port.
Managing messages
hub.
primary page.
The system can read folders and image files in Press "SMS".
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp; .png.
Select the "SMS" tab.

primary page.
Press "Photos". Press this button to select the

display settings for messages.
Select a folder. Press this button to search for a

contact.
Select an image to view. Select the "Quick messages" tab.
Press this button to display the Press this button to select the
details of the photo. display settings for messages.
6
Radio Radio reception may be affected by the Presetting a station

use of electrical equipment not approved
Select a radio station or frequency.
Selecting a station by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
Make a short press on the star
Press Radio Media to display the The external environment (hills, buildings,
outline. If the star is solid, the radio
primary page. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
station is already preset.
block reception, including in RDS mode.
Press one of the buttons for an This is a normal effect of the way in
automatic search for radio stations. which radio waves are transmitted and Or
does not indicate any failure of the audio
equipment. Select a radio station or frequency.
Or Press "Preset".
Move the cursor for a manual search Make a long press on one of the
for frequencies up or down. buttons to preset the station.
Changing waveband
Or
Activating / Deactivating
Press the frequency. primary page. RDS
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the primary page.
secondary page.
Enter the FM and AM waveband Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
values using the virtual keypad. Press "Band" to change waveband. secondary page.
Activate / Deactivate "RDS".

Press in the grey zone to confirm.
.
7
The RDS, if activated, enables you to Play TA messages Audio settings

continue listening to the same station
by automatically retuning to alternative Press Radio Media to display the
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function primary page.
frequencies. However, in certain conditions,
gives priority to TA alert messages.
coverage of this RDS station may not be
To operate, this function needs good
assured throughout the entire country as Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
reception of a radio station that carries
radio stations do not cover 100% of the secondary page.
this type of message. While traffic
territory. This explains the loss of reception of
information is being broadcast, the current
the station during a journey. Press "Audio settings".
media is automatically interrupted so that
the TA message can be heard. Normal
Display text information play of the media previously playing is
resumed at the end of the message.
Select the "Tone" or "Balance"
or "Ringtones" or "Sound" tab to
The "Radio Text" function allows configure the audio settings.
information transmitted by the radio
station and related to the station or the Press Radio Media to display the
song playing to be displayed. primary page. Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press Radio Media to display the Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
primary page. secondary page.
In the tab "Tone", the Ambience audio
Activate / Deactivate "TA". settings, as well as Bass, Medium and
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the Treble are different and independent for
secondary page. each audio source.
On the "Balance" tab, the All
Press in the grey zone to confirm. passengers, Driver and Front only
Activate / Deactivate "News".
settings are common to all sources.
On the "Sound" tab, activate or deactivate
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary
Press in the grey zone to confirm. input" and "Touch tones".
8
The sound distribution (or spatialisation DAB (Digital Audio FM-DAB Follow-up
with the Arkamys© system) is audio
processing that allows the quality of the
Broadcasting) radio
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
sound to be adapted according to the
number of passengers in the vehicle.
Terrestrial Digital Radio territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
the "FM-DAB Follow-up" allows you to
Digital radio provides higher quality continue listening to the same station,
reception. by automatically switching to the
Onboard audio: the Sound Staging of The different multiplexes offer a choice corresponding FM analogue station
Arkamys© optimises the distribution of of radio stations arranged in alphabetical (if there is one).
sound in the passenger compartment. order.

Press Radio Media to display the primary page.
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the secondary page.
secondary page.
Activate / Deactivate "FM-DAB
Press "Waveband" to select the Follow-up".
"DAB band".
.
9
If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there Media Auxiliary socket (AUX)

is a difference of a few seconds when the
system switches to FM analogue radio Port USB (depending on model / depending on equipment)
with sometimes a variation in volume.
When the digital signal quality becomes
good, the system automatically switches
back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station being listened to is

not available on "FM", or if the "FM-DAB Insert the USB memory stick in the USB port or
Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
connect the USB device to the USB port using
cut out while the digital signal is too weak. has been checked in the audio settings.
a suitable cable (not supplied).

Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc:)
hub.
to the auxiliary jack socket using an audio
cable (not supplied).
The system builds playlists (in temporary First, adjust the volume on your portable device
memory), an operation which can take from (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
a few seconds to several minutes at the first audio system.
connection. Display and management of the controls are
Reduce the number of non-music files and the via the portable device.
The playlists are updated every time the
ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick
is connected. The lists are memorised: if they
are not modified, the subsequent loading time
will be shorter.
10
Selecting the source Connecting Apple® players Information and advice

Press Radio Media to display the Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port
The system supports USB Mass Storage
primary page. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
devices, BlackBerry ® devices or Apple ®
Play starts automatically.
players via USB ports. The adapter cable
Press the "SOURCES" button. Control is via the audio system. is not supplied.
Device management is done by the audio
Choose the source. system controls.
Other peripherals, not recognised on
The classifications available are those connection, must be connected to the
Bluetooth® streaming audio of the portable device connected auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not
(artists / albums / genres / playlists / supplied) or via Bluetooth streaming,
Streaming allows you to listen to music from audiobooks / podcasts), you can also use depending on compatibility.
your smartphone. a classification structured in the form of a
library.
The default classification used is by artist.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first
To modify the classification used, return
adjust the volume on your portable device (to a
to the first level of the menu then select
high level). To protect the system, do not use a USB
the desired classification (playlists for
Then adjust the volume of your system. hub.
example) and confirm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the The audio equipment will only play audio files
smartphone. with ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3"
Control is from the portable device or by using file extensions and with a bit rate of between
the system's touch buttons. 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
The version of software in the audio system
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
may not be compatible with the generation of
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
your Apple ® player.
Once connected in Streaming mode, the ".wma" files must be of the standard wma
smartphone is considered to be a media 9 type.
.
source. Sampling frequencies supported are 11, 22,
44 and 48 kHz.
11
It is advisable to restrict file names to

20 characters, without using special characters
Telephone As a safety measure, applications can
only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
(e.g.: " " ? .; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
display problems. MirrorLinkTM smartphone moving.
connection
Use only USB keys in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
As a safety measure and because it The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a
requires sustained attention by the driver, compatible smartphone and applications.
It is recommended that the original USB prohibited.
cable for the portable device is used. All operations must be done with the
vehicle stationary.
Telephone not connected by
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or
Bluetooth®
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or
The synchronisation of a personal Connect a USB cable. The
smartphone allows users to display smartphone charges when
applications adapted for the smartphone's connected by a USB cable.
not be played correctly.
MirrorLinkTM technology on the vehicle
It is recommended that the same burning
screen. From the system, press
standard is always used on an individual disc,
The principles and standards "Telephone" to display the primary
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum)
are constantly changing, for the page.
for the best acoustic quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the
Joliet standard is recommended. Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the
it is essential that the smartphone is
unlocked; update the operating system of application in the system.
the smartphone as well as the date and
time of the smartphone and the system.
For the list of eligible smartphones, go Depending on the smartphone, it may be
to the Brand's internet website in your necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM"
country. function.
12
During the procedure, several Access to the different audio sources remains
The synchronisation of a personal
screen pages relating to certain accessible in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM
smartphone allows users to display
functions are displayed. display, using touch buttons in the upper bar.
applications adapted for the smartphone's
Accept to start and complete the Access to the menus for the system is possible
CarPlay ® technology on the vehicle screen
connection. at any time using the dedicated buttons.
when the smartphone's CarPlay ® function
has been previously activated.
When connecting a smartphone As the principles and standards are
to the system, it is recommended constantly changing, it is recommended
that Bluetooth® be started on the There may be a wait for the availability of that you keep your smartphone's
smartphone applications, depending on the quality of operating system updated.
your network. For the list of eligible smartphones, go
to the Brand's internet website in your
country.
Telephone connected by
Bluetooth® CarPlay® smartphone
connection
"Telephone" to display the primary Connect a USB cable. The
page. As a safety measure and because it smartphone charges when
requires sustained attention by the driver, connected by a USB cable.
Press the "PHONE" button to display the using a smartphone when driving is
secondary page. prohibited.
From the system, press Telephone
to display the CarPlay ® interface.
Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the vehicle stationary.
Or
Once the connection is established, a page
is displayed with the applications already If the smartphone is already
downloaded to your smartphone and adapted connected by Bluetooth ®.
.
to MirrorLinkTM technology.
13
Connect a USB cable. The Smartphone connection As a safety measure, applications can
smartphone charges when
Android Auto only be viewed with the vehicle stationary;
moving.
"Telephone" to display the primary
page.
prohibited. The "Android Auto" function requires the
All operations must be done with the use of a compatible smartphone and
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the vehicle stationary. applications.
secondary page.
Press on "CarPlay" to display the On your smartphone, download the

CarPlay ® interface. Android Auto application. Telephone not connected by
Bluetooth®
The synchronisation of a personal Connect a USB cable. The

smartphone allows users to display smartphone charges when
On connecting the USB cable, the connected by a USB cable.
applications adapted for the smartphone's
CarPlay ® function deactivates the
Android Auto technology on the vehicle
system's Bluetooth® mode.
screen.
The principles and standards
"Telephone" to display the primary
are constantly changing, for the
page.
You can go to the CarPlay ® smartphone and the system to operate,
navigation at any time by pressing it is essential that the smartphone is Press "Android Auto" to start the
the system's Navigation button. unlocked; update the operating system application in the system.
of the smartphone as well as the date
and time of the smartphone and the
system. Depending on the smartphone, it may be
For the list of eligible smartphones, go necessary to activate the "Android Auto"
to the Brand's internet website in your function.
country.
14
During the procedure, several Procedure from the telephone

There may be a wait for the availability of
screen pages relating to certain
applications, depending on the quality of
functions are displayed. Select the name of the system in the
your network.
Accept to start and complete the list of devices detected.
connection.
In the system, accept the connection request

When connecting a smartphone Pairing a Bluetooth® from the telephone.
to the system, it is recommended
that Bluetooth® be started on the
telephone
smartphone
As a safety measure and because it To complete the pairing, whichever

Telephone connected by requires sustained attention by the procedure used (from the telephone or
Bluetooth® driver, the pairing of a Bluetooth mobile from the system), ensure that the code
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free is the same in the system and in the
From the system, press system of your audio system must be telephone.
"Telephone" to display the primary done with the vehicle stationary and the
page. ignition on.
Procedure from the system

Press the "PHONE" button to display the
secondary page. Press "Telephone" to display the
primary page.
Activate the Bluetooth function on the
Press "Android Auto" to start the
telephone and ensure that it is "visible to
all" (telephone configuration).
Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of telephones detected is
Different audio sources remain accessible in displayed.
the margin of the Android Auto display, using
touch buttons in the upper bar.
Access to the menus for the system is possible
.
at any time using the dedicated buttons. Select the name of the chosen
telephone in the list.
15
Press "Bluetooth connection" to

If the pairing procedure fails, it is The services available depend on
display the list of paired devices.
recommended that you deactivate and the network, the SIM card and the
then reactivate the Bluetooth® function in compatibility of the Bluetooth devices
your telephone. used. Check the instructions for your
Press the "details" button of a paired telephone and with your service provider
device. for the services to which you have access.
Depending on the type of telephone, you

may be asked to accept or not the transfer
of your contacts and messages. The system offers to connect the telephone
The profiles compatible with the system
with 3 profiles:
are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
MAP and PAN.
only),
Automatic reconnection - "Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of
the audio files on the telephone),
- "Internet data". Go to the Brand's website for more information
On return to the vehicle, if the last (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
telephone connected is present again, it is
Select one or more profiles.
automatically recognised and within about
30 seconds of switching on the ignition,
the connection is established without any
Managing paired telephones
action on your part (Bluetooth activated).
This function allows the connection or
disconnection of a peripheral device as
well as the deletion of a pairing.
To modify the connection profile:

The ability of the system to connect to just Press "Telephone" to display the
primary page.
one profile depends on the telephone. primary page.
All three profiles may connect by default.
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
secondary page.
secondary page.
16
Press "Bluetooth connection" to And Enter the phone number using the
display the list of paired devices. digital keypad.
Make a long press
Press "Call" to start the call.

Press on the name of the telephone
chosen in the list to disconnect it. on the steering mounted PHONE
Press again to connect it. button to reject the call.
Or
Calling a contact
Press "End call".
Deleting a telephone Press "Telephone" to display the
primary page.
Press the basket at the top right
of the screen to display a basket
Or make a long press
alongside the telephone chosen.
Making a call
Press the basket alongside the Using the telephone is not recommended on the steering mounted PHONE
telephone chosen to delete it. while driving. button.
Park the vehicle.
Make the call using the steering mounted
controls. Press "Contacts".
Receiving a call Select the desired contact from the list offered.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a Calling a new number

superimposed display in the screen. Press "Call".
Make a short press on the steering primary page.
.
mounted PHONE button to accept
an incoming call.
17
Calling a recently used Setting the ringtone Configuration

number
Press "Telephone" to display the Profile settings
primary page.
primary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the requires the sustained attention of the
secondary page. driver, changes to settings must only be
Or
done with the vehicle stationary.
Make a long press Press "Ring volume" to display the
volume bar.
primary page.
on the steering mounted button. Press the arrows or move the cursor
to set the ring volume.
Press "Profiles".
Press "Recent calls".
Select the desired contact from the list offered.

Select "Profile 1" or "Profile 2" or "Profile 3"
or "Common profile".
It is always possible to make a call directly Press this button to enter a name for
from the telephone; as a safety measure, the profile using the virtual keypad.
first park the vehicle.
Press "OK" to save.
18
Press the back arrow to confirm. Modifying system settings Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press this button to activate the Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the
profile. primary page. primary page.
Press the back arrow again to Press "Configuration" to go to the Press "Configuration" to go to the
confirm. secondary page. secondary page.
Press "Screen configuration".

Press this button to initialise the Press "System configuration".
profile selected.
Press "Brightness".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
fuel consumption and temperature.
Adjust luminosity Move the cursor to adjust the brightness
of the screen and/or of the instrument
Press Settings to display the Press "Factory settings" to return to the initial
panel (according to version).
primary page. settings.
Press "Animation".
Press Brightness. Returning the system to factory settings
Activate or deactivate: "Automatic
activates the English language by default
scrolling".
(according to version).
Move the cursor to adjust the Select "Animated transitions".

brightness of the screen and/or of the Select "System info" to display the versions of
instrument panel (according to version). the different modules installed in the system.
.
Press in the grey zone to confirm. Press the back arrow to confirm.
19
Select the language Press this button to adjust the time Setting the date
using the virtual keypad.
Press Settings to display the Press Settings to display the
Press "OK" to save the time.
Press "Configuration" to go to the

Press "Configuration" to go to the
secondary page.
Press this button to define the time secondary page.
zone.
Select "Language" to change the
language. Press "Date and time".
Select the display format for the time
(12h / 24h).
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Activate or deactivate Select "Date".
synchronisation with GPS (UTC).
Press on this button to define the
date.
Setting the time Press the back arrow to save the

settings. Press the back arrow to save the
primary page. date.
Press "Configuration" to go to the The system does not automatically manage Select the display format of the date.
secondary page. the change between winter and summer
time (depending on the country of sale).
Press the back arrow again to
Press "Date and time".
confirm.
Select "Time".
20
Adjustment of the time and date is only Frequently asked

available if "GPS Synchronisation:" is
deactivated.
questions
The change between winter and summer The following information groups together the
time is done by changing the time zone. answers to the most frequently asked questions
concerning your audio system.
.
21
Radio
The reception quality of the tuned radio station The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
gradually deteriorates or the stored stations are the station or no transmitter is present in the upper band to enable the system to check
not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, geographical area. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in
etc.). the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not
basement car parks, etc.) block reception, indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
including in RDS mode.
example when going through a car wash or into
an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The station is not picked or has changed its Press the round arrow on the "List" tab of the
picked stations. name in the list. "Radio" page.
The name of the radio station changes.
Some radio stations send other information
in place of their name (the title of the song for
example).
The system interprets these details as the
station name.
22
Media
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only Some files supplied with the memory stick Delete the files supplied with the memory stick
after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). may greatly slow down access to reading and limit the number of sub-folders in the file
the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the structure on the memory stick.
catalogue time).
Some information characters in the currently The audio system does not display some types Use standard characters to name tracks and
playing media are not displayed correctly. of characters. folders.
Playback of streaming files does not start. The connected device does not automatically To start playback from the device.
launch playback.
Names of tracks and playing time are not The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer
displayed on the audio streaming screen. of this information.
.
23
Telephone
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched off or the telephone may not be visible. switched on.
Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible
to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with You can check the compatibility of your
the system. telephone at the Brand's website (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in The sound depends on both the system and the Increase the volume of the audio system, to
Bluetooth mode is inaudible. telephone. maximum if required, and increase the volume
of the telephone if necessary.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
telephone call. windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down, etc.).
The contacts are listed in alphabetical order. Some telephones offer display options. Modify the telephone directory display settings.
Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
be transferred in a specific order.
24
Settings
In changing the setting of treble and bass the The selection of an equalizer setting imposes Modify the treble and bass or equalizer settings
equalizer setting is deselected. the settings for treble and bass and vice-versa. to obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing the equalizer setting, the treble
and bass settings are reset.
When changing the balance setting, distribution The selection of a distribution setting imposes Modify the balance setting or the distribution
is deselected. the balance settings and vice-versa. setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
When changing the distribution setting, the
balance setting is deselected.
There is a difference in sound quality between To allow for optimal listening quality, the Check that the audio settings are adapted to the
the different audio sources. audio settings can be tailored to different sources listened to. Adjust the audio functions
sound sources, which can generate audible to the middle position.
differences when changing source.
When the engine is off, the system stops after When the engine is switched off, the system's Turn the ignition on to increase the charge of
several minutes of use. operating time depends on the state of charge the battery.
of the battery.
In normal off state, the system automatically
goes into energy economy mode to maintain an
adequate charge in the battery.
.
25
26
.
27
Bluetooth® audio system
Bluetooth® audio system The different functions and settings


ignition on.
Your audio system is coded in such a way

that it will only operate in your vehicle.
Contents All work on the system must be
carried out exclusively by a dealer or
First steps 2 qualified workshop, to avoid any risk of
Steering mounted controls 3
electrocution, fire or mechanical faults.
Menus 4
Radio 4
DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting) 6
Media 8
Telephone 11
Frequently asked questions 16 To avoid discharging the battery, the audio
system may switch off after a few minutes
.
if the engine is not running.
1
Select the screen display mode, Abandon the current operation.

First steps between: Go up one level (menu or folder).
Date; Audio functions; Trip
Press: On / Off.
computer; Telephone.
Rotate: adjust volume.
Access to the main menu.
Confirm or display contextual menu.
Short press: change audio source

(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment
connected); CD; streaming). Buttons 1 to 6. Activate / Deactivate TA (traffic
Long press: display the Telephone Short press: select the preset radio announcements).
menu (if a telephone is connected). station. Long press: select type of
Long press: preset a radio station. announcement.
Selection of FM / DAB / AM
Adjust audio settings: Radio: wavebands.
Front/rear fader; left/right balance; Automatic step by step search up /
bass/treble; loudness; audio down for radio stations.
ambience. Media:
Activation / Deactivation of Select previous / next CD, USB,
automatic volume adjustment (linked streaming track.
to the speed of the vehicle). Scroll in a list.
Radio:
Radio:
Short press: display the list of radio
Manual step by step search up /
stations.
down for radio stations.
Long press: update the list.
Select previous / next MP3 folder.
Media:
Media:
Short press: display the list of
Select previous/next folder / genre /
folders.
artist / playlist on the USB device.
Long press: display the available
Scroll in a list.
sorting options.
2
Other than telephone call: Steering mounted

Steering mounted controls Short press: changing audio source
(radio; USB; AUX (if equipment
controls – Type 2
Steering mounted connected); CD; streaming),
controls – Type 1 confirmation if the "Telephone"
menu is open.
Long press: open the "Telephone" Access to the main menu.
menu.
In the event of a telephone call:
Radio: Short press: accept the call. Increase volume.
Select the previous / next preset Long press: reject the call.
radio station. During a telephone call:
Select the previous / next item in a Short press: open the contextual Mute / Restore the sound.
menu or a list. telephone menu.
Media: Long press: end the call.
Select the previous / next track. Decrease volume.
menu or a list.
Confirm a selection. Other than telephone call:
Short press: changing audio source
Radio: (radio; USB; AUX (if equipment
Short press: display the list of radio connected); CD; streaming),
Increase volume. confirmation if the "Telephone"
stations.
Long press: update the list. menu is open.
Media: Long press: open the "Telephone"
Short press: display the list of menu.
Decrease volume.
folders. In the event of a telephone call:
Long press: display the available Short press: accept the call.
sorting options. Long press: reject the call.
Mute / Restore sound by During a telephone call:
simultaneously pressing the Short press: open the contextual
.
increase and decrease volume telephone menu.
buttons. Long press: end the call.
3
Start voice recognition on your

smartphone via the system.
Menus Radio
Depending on version.
Selecting a station
"Multimedia": Media settings, Radio
Radio: Press the SOURCE button
settings.
Short press: display the list of radio repeatedly and select the radio.
stations. "Telephone": Call, Directory
Long press: update the list. management, Telephone
Media: Press this button to select a
management, Hang up.
Short press: display the list of waveband (FM / AM / DAB).
folders. "Trip computer".
Long press: display the available Press one of the buttons for an
sorting options. automatic search for radio stations.
"Maintenance": Diagnosis, Warning
log, etc .
Radio:
Press one of the buttons to carry out
Select the previous / next preset "Connections": Manage
a manual search up / down for radio
radio station. connections, search for devices.
frequencies.
menu or a list. "Personalisation-configuration":
Media: Define the vehicle parameters, Press this button to display the list of
Select the previous / next track. Choice of language, Display stations received locally.
Select the previous / next item in a configuration, Choice of units, Date To update this list, press for more
menu or a list. and time adjustment. than two seconds. The sound is cut
Press the thumbwheel: confirm. while updating.
Press the "MENU" button.
Move from one menu to another.
Enter a menu.
4
RDS Long procedure Play TA messages

Press the MENU button.
The external environment (hills, buildings, The TA (Traffic Announcement) function
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may gives priority to TA alert messages.
block reception, including in RDS mode. To operate, this function needs good
Select "Audio functions". reception of a radio station that carries
This is a normal effect of the way in
which radio waves are transmitted and this type of message. When a traffic
does not indicate any failure of the audio report is transmitted, the current audio
equipment. Press OK. source (Radio, CD, etc.) is interrupted
automatically to play the TA message.
Normal play of the media previously
playing is resumed at the end of the
Select the "FM waveband
If RDS is not available, the RDS symbol message.
preferences" function.
appears barred in the screen.
Press OK.
Take care when increasing the volume
The RDS, if activated, enables you to while listening to TA messages. The
continue listening to the same station volume may prove too high on return to
Select "Frequency tracking
by automatic retuning to alternative the original audio source.
(RDS)".
frequencies. However, in certain
conditions, coverage of an RDS station
may not be assured throughout the entire Press OK, RDS is displayed on the
country as radio stations do not cover screen. Press the TA button to activate or
100% of the territory. This explains the deactivate traffic messages.
loss of reception of the station during a
journey.
Short procedure
.
In "Radio" mode, press the OK button to
activate or deactivate RDS directly.
5
Receiving INFO messages Display TEXT INFOS DAB (Digital Audio

Broadcasting) radio
The INFO function gives priority to TA Radio text is information transmitted by According to version
alert messages. To be active, this function the radio station related to the station's
needs good reception of a radio station current programme or song. If the current "DAB" radio station is not
that transmits this type of message. When available on "FM", "DAB FM" is struck out.
a message is transmitted, the current
audio source (Radio, CD, USB, etc.) is
interrupted automatically to receive the When the radio station is displayed
INFO message. Normal play of the media in the screen, press OK to display
previously playing is resumed at the end the contextual menu.
of the message.
Select "RadioText (TXT) display"
and confirm OK to save.
Make a long press on this button to

display the list of categories.
1 Option display: if active but not available,
the display will be struck out.
Select or deselect categories.
2 Display of the name of the current station.
3 Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6.
Short press: select the preset radio
Activate or deactivate the reception
station.
of the corresponding messages.
Long press: memorise a radio station.
4 Display the name of the "multiplex"
service being used, also called
"ensemble".
5 Display RadioText (TXT) for the current
radio station.
6 Represents the signal strength for the
band being listened to.
6
Starting of a search for the previous / Press the MENU button.

When changing region, an update of the
next "multiplex service".
list of preset radio stations is advisable.
Select "Multimedia" and confirm.

Long press: selection of the
categories of news desired among
Transport, News, Entertainment and
Special Flash (available according to Select "DAB / FM auto tracking"
the station). and confirm.
Display of the list of all radio stations When the radio station is displayed in
and "multiplexes". the screen, press "OK" to display the If "DAB / FM auto tracking" tracking is
contextual menu. enabled, there is a lag of a few seconds
(Frequency search (RDS), DAB / FM when the system switches to FM analogue
Terrestrial digital radio auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, radio, sometimes with a change in volume.
Information on the station, etc.)
Digital radio provides a superior audio
quality and also additional categories of
traffic announcements (TA INFO).
The different "multiplex services" offer a
DAB/FM station tracking If the "DAB" station you are listening to is
choice of radio stations in alphabetical not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option
order. "DAB" does not have 100% coverage of barred), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking"
the country. is not on, the sound will be cut when the
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB digital signal is too weak.
/ FM auto tracking" allows you to
continue listening to the same station,
Change of band (FM1, FM2, DAB,
by automatically switching to the
etc.)
corresponding analogue FM station (if it
exists).
.
When the "DAB / FM auto tracking" is
Change of station within the same active, the DAB station will be selected
"multiplex service". automatically.
7
Playlists are updated every time a new USB Press this button to confirm.
Media memory stick is connected.
USB port
The choice made is displayed at the top of the
When the USB port is used, the portable screen.
device charges automatically.
Choosing a track to play
Press one of these buttons to go to
Play mode the previous / next track.
The play modes available are:

Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port - Normal: the tracks are played in order,
or connect the USB device to the USB port Press one of these buttons to go to
depending on the classification of the
using a suitable cable (not supplied). the previous / next folder.
selected files.
The system changes automatically to "USB" - Random: the tracks in an album or folder
source. are played in a random order.
- Random on all media: all of the tracks
To protect the system, do not use a USB saved in the media are played in random File classification
hub. order. Make a long press on this button to
- Repeat: the tracks played are only those display the different classifications.
from the current album or folder.
Any additional equipment connected to
the system must conform to the standard
Select by "Folder" / "Artist" /
of the product or standard IEC 60950-1.
"Genre" / "Playlist".
Press this button to display the
Depending on availability and type
contextual menu for the Media
of device used.
The system builds playlists (in temporary function.
memory), an operation which can take from
Press OK to select the desired
a few seconds to several minutes at the first
Press this button to select the classification, then press OK again
connection.
chosen play mode. to confirm.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
8
Playing files Jack Input AUX (AUX) socket CD player

Make a short press on this button to (depending on model / depending on equipment) Insert circular compact discs only.
display the chosen classification. Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs
or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may
cause faults which are no reflection on the
quality of the original player.
Navigate in the list using the left / Insert a CD in the player, play begins
right and up / down buttons. automatically.
Confirm the selection by pressing

OK. Connect the portable device (MP3 player, etc:)
to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio External CD players connected via the
cable (not supplied). USB port are not recognised by the
system.
Press one of these buttons to go to
Any additional equipment connected to
the previous / next track in the list.
the system must conform to the standard
Press and hold one of these buttons
of the product or standard IEC 60950-1. To play a disc which has already
for fast forward or fast back.
been inserted, press the SOURCE
button several times in succession
Press the SOURCE button several and select "CD".
times in succession and select
Press one of these buttons to go "AUX". Press one of the buttons to select a
to the next "Folder" / "Artist" /
track on the CD.
"Genre" / "Playlist"* previous/next First adjust the volume on your portable device
in the list. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your
audio system. Display and management of the Press the LIST button to display the
controls are via the portable device. list of tracks on the CD.
.
Do not connect a device to both the Jack
auxiliary socket and the USB port at the Press and hold one of these buttons
same time. for fast forward or fast back.
* Depending on availability and the type of
device used.
9
Playing an MP3 compilation Press the LIST button to display Connecting Apple® players
the list of directories of the
MP3 compilation. Connect the Apple ® player to the USB port
Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. using a suitable cable (not supplied).
The audio equipment searches for all of the Press and hold one of these buttons Play starts automatically.
music tracks, which may take anything between for fast forward or fast back.
Control is via the audio system.
a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
before play begins.
The classifications available are those of the
portable device connected (artists / albums /
Bluetooth® audio streaming genres / playlists).
On a single disc, the CD player can
read up to 255 MP3 files spread over Streaming allows music files on the telephone The version of software in the audio system
8 directory levels. to be played via the vehicle's loudspeakers. may not be compatible with the generation of
However, it is advisable to keep to a limit your Apple ® player.
of two levels to reduce the access time
before the CD is played. Connect the telephone.
The folder structure is not observed during (Refer to the "Pairing a telephone" section).
playback. Information and advice
All of the files are displayed on a single
level. Activate the streaming source by The CD player can play files with ".mp3",
pressing SOURCE. ".wma", ".wav" and ".aac" file extensions, with a
In certain cases, play of the audio bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps.
To play a disc which has already files must be initiated from the It also supports TAG mode (ID3 tag, WMA
been inserted, press the SOURCE keypad. TAG).
button several times in succession No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
and select "CD". Audio files can be selected using the buttons Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
on the audio system control panel and the 9 standard.
Press one of the buttons to select a The sampling rates supported are 11, 22,
steering mounted controls The contextual
folder on the CD. 44 and 48 kHz.
information can be displayed in the screen.
If the telephone supports the function. The
Press one of the buttons to select a audio quality depends on the quality of
track on the CD. transmission by the telephone.
10
Via the USB port, the system can play audio

files with the extension ".mp3", ".wma", ".wav",
Use only USB memory sticks formatted Telephone
FAT 32 (File Allocation Table).
".cbr", or ".vbr" with a bit rate of 32 to 320 Kbps.
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
Pair a Bluetooth® telephone
Files of the ".wma" type should be to the wma
9 standard.
The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, As a safety measure and because they
It is recommended that you use genuine
44 and 48 kHz. require prolonged attention on the part
Apple ® USB cables for correct operation.
of the driver, the operations for pairing
of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with
the Bluetooth hands-free system of your
File names should have fewer than audio system must be carried out with the
20 characters, avoiding special characters vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
(e.g.: " ?; ù) so as to avoid any reading or
display problems.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth
In order to be able to play a burned CDR or function and ensure that it is "visible to all"
CDRW, select standards ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or (telephone configuration).
not be played correctly. The services available depend on
It is recommended that the same burning the network, the SIM card and the
standard is always used on an individual disc, compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone
with the lowest speed possible (4x maximum) used.
for the best acoustic quality. Check the instructions for your telephone
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the and with your service provider for the
Joliet standard is recommended. services to which you have access.
Procedure from the telephone
.
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. Select the name of the system in the
list of devices detected.
11
Procedure from the system Information and advice Select "Connections

management" and confirm. The list
Press the MENU button. The "Telephone" menu gives access to the of paired devices is displayed.
following functions in particular: "Directory", if
your telephone equipment is fully compatible,
Confirm with OK.
Select "Connections". "Call log", "View paired devices".
Depending on the type of telephone, you may
be asked to accept or confirm access by the
Confirm with OK. system to each of these functions. Indicates that a device is connected.
Select "Search for a device".

Go to the Brand's website for more
information (compatibility, more help, etc.).
Confirm with OK. A number indicates the profile of the
connection with the system:
- 1 for media or 1 for telephone.
A window is displayed with a search in progress
Manage connections - 2 for media and telephone.
message.
The telephone connection automatically
includes hands free operation and audio Indicates connection of the audio
In the list of devices detected, select a
streaming. steaming profile.
telephone to pair. Only one telephone can be
paired at a time. The ability of the system to connect to just
one profile depends on the telephone.
Completing the pairing Both profiles may connect by default. Indicates the hands-free telephone
profile.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure used (from the telephone or Press the MENU button.
from the system), ensure that the code
is the same in the system and in the Select a telephone.
Select "Connections".
telephone.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not restricted. Confirm with OK. Confirm with OK.
A message appears in the screen confirming the
pairing.
12
Then select and confirm: Receiving a call Ending a call

- "Connect telephone" /
"Disconnect telephone": An incoming call is announced by a ring and a In the "Telephone" menu.
to connect / disconnect the superimposed display in the screen.
Select "End call".
telephone or the hands-free kit
only. Confirm with OK to end the call.
Select the "YES" tab in the screen
- "Connect media player" / using the buttons.
"Disconnect media player": During a call, press one of the
to connect / disconnect streaming Confirm with OK. buttons for more than two seconds.
only.
- "Connect telephone +
media player" / "Disconnect Press this button at the steering The system accesses the telephone's contacts
telephone + media player": mounted controls to accept the call. directory, depending on its compatibility, and
to connect / disconnect the while it is connected via Bluetooth.
telephone (hands-free kit and
streaming). Making a call
- "Delete connection": to delete
In the "Telephone" menu. With certain telephones connected by
the pairing.
Bluetooth you can send a contact to the
Select "Call".
directory of the audio system.
Select "Dial". Contacts imported in this way are saved
Or in a permanent directory visible to all,
whatever the telephone connected.
When you delete a pairing in the system, Select "Directory". The menu for the directory is not
remember to delete it from your telephone Or accessible if it is empty.
as well.
Select "Calls list".
Confirm with OK.

Confirm with OK.
Managing calls
Press this button for more than During a call, press OK to display
.
two seconds for access to your the contextual menu.
directory, then navigate using the
thumb wheel.
13
End call Confirm with OK. Directory

In the contextual menu, select To access the directory, press and
"Hang up" to end the call. hold SRC/TEL.
If the contact has been cut off, when you
reconnect on returning to the vehicle,
the Bluetooth connection will be restored
automatically and sound returned to the Select "Directory" to see the list of
Confirm with OK. system (depending on the compatibility of the contacts.
telephone).
In some cases, the combined mode must be
Microphone off activated from the telephone. Confirm with OK.
(so that the caller cannot hear)
In the contextual menu: Interactive voice response
- select "Micro OFF" to switch off
the microphone. From the contextual menu, select To modify the contacts saved in the
- deselect "Micro OFF" to switch "DTMF tones" and confirm to use system, press MENU then select
the microphone on. the digital keypad to navigate in the "Telephone" and confirm.
interactive voice response menu. Select "Directory management"
Confirm with OK.
and confirm.
You can:
Confirm with OK. - "Consult an entry",
- "Delete an entry",
Telephone mode - "Delete all entries".
In the contextual menu:
Consultation call
- select "Telephone mode" to
transfer the call to the telephone From the contextual menu, select
The system accesses the
(for example, to leave the "Switch" and validate to return to a
telephone's contacts directory,
vehicle while continuing a call left on hold.
depending on its compatibility, and
conversation).
while it is connected via Bluetooth.
- deselect "Telephone mode" to
transfer the call to the vehicle. Confirm with OK.
14
With certain telephones connected

Voice recognition requires the use of a
by Bluetooth you can send a contact
compatible smartphone first connected to
to the directory of the audio system.
the vehicle by Bluetooth.
Contacts imported in this way are
saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone
connected.
The menu for the directory is not
accessible if it is empty.
Voice recognition
This function allows you to use your
smartphone's voice recognition via the system.
To start voice recognition, depending on the

type of steering mounted controls:
Make a long press on the end of the lighting

control stalk.
OR
Press this button.
.
15
Frequently asked questions

The following information groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
With the engine off, the audio system switches When the engine is switched off, the audio Turn the ignition on to increase the charge of
off after a few minutes of use. system operating time depends on the state of the battery.
charge of the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the audio system
switches to economy mode and switches off to
prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
The message "the audio system is overheated" In order to protect the installation if the Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
appears on the display. surrounding temperature is too high, the audio allow the system to cool.
system switches to an automatic thermal
protection mode leading to a reduction in
volume or the CD play stopping.
16
Radio
There is a difference in sound quality To allow for optimal listening quality, the audio Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
between the different audio sources settings (Volume, Bass, treble, Ambience, Treble, Ambience and Loudness) are adapted to
(radio, CD, etc.). Loudness) can be tailored to different sound the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
sources, which can generate audible differences audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance
when changing source (radio, CD, etc.). and Left-Right Balance) to the middle position,
select the musical ambience "None" and set the
loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD
mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
The preset stations do not function (no An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the waveband
sound, 87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.). (FM, FM2, DAB, AM) on which the stations are
preset.
The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I The radio station is not part of the regional traffic Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic
do not receive any traffic information. information network. information.
The reception quality of the tuned radio The vehicle is too far from the transmitter of Activate the RDS function to allow the system to
station gradually deteriorates or the the station or no transmitter is present in the see if a more powerful transmitter is within the
stored stations are not working (no sound, geographical area. geographic area.
87.5 MHz is displayed, etc.).
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
basement car parks, etc.) block reception, including a failure of the audio equipment.
in RDS mode.
example when going through an automatic car
wash or in an underground car park).
.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to 2 seconds in radio During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches Switch off the RDS function if the phenomenon is
mode. for another frequency giving better reception of the too frequent and always on the same route.
station.
17
Media
The Bluetooth connection is cut. The battery of the peripheral may not be Charge the battery of the peripheral device.
sufficiently charged.
The message "USB device error" is displayed in The USB memory stick is not recognised. Reformat the USB memory stick.
the screen. The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
The CD is ejected every time or is not played. The CD is upside down, cannot be read, does - Check that the CD is inserted in the player
not contain audio files or contains audio files of the right way up.
a format not recognised by the audio system. - Check the condition of the CD: the CD
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating system cannot be played if it is too badly damaged.
not recognised by the audio system. - Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio"
section.
- Due to insufficient quality, certain burned
CDs will not be read by the audio system.
The CD sound is of poor quality. The CD used in scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are Return bass and treble settings to 0, without
unsuitable. selecting an ambience.
I am unable to play the music files on my Depending on the smartphone, access by the Manual activate the MTP profile on the
smartphone via the USB port. audio system to music on the smartphone may smartphone (USB settings menu).
have to be approved on the latter.
18
Telephone
I am unable to access my voicemail. Few telephones or service providers allow the Call the voicemail, via the telephone menu,
use of this function. using the number provided by your operator.
I am unable to access my directory of contacts. Check the compatibility of your telephone.
You did not give access to your contacts when Accept or confirm access by the system to the
pairing the telephone. contacts on your telephone.
I am unable to continue a conversation when Telephone mode is activated. Deselect telephone mode to transfer the call to
getting into my vehicle. the vehicle.
I am unable to pair my telephone by Bluetooth. Telephones (models, versions of operating Before starting the pairing procedure, delete the
systems) have their own specific aspects in the pairing of the telephone from the system and of
pairing procedure and some telephones are not the system from the telephone, so as to see the
compatible. compatibility of the telephones.
.
19
20
.
21
22
Alphabetical index
A B
ABS..................................................................92 Battery.....................................163, 170, 195-198 Checks, routine.......................................170-172
Accessories............................................. 87, 123 Battery, charging............................................197 Child lock................................................. 116-117
Active Safety Brake..........................16, 142-144 Battery, remote control..............................48, 50 Children....................................107, 109-111, 113
AdBlue ®.......................................20, 30, 172-173 Blind, panoramic roof.......................................70 Children (safety)............................................. 116
Additive, AdBlue...............................................20 Blind spot monitoring system..................148-150 Child seats ................96, 100-101, 106-107, 115
Adjusting headlamps.......................................83 Blind spot sensors........................... 23, 148-150 Child seats, conventional........................106-107
Adjusting head restraints.................................58 BlueHDi............................................ 30, 172, 176 Child seats, i-Size.......................................... 113
Adjusting seat............................................ 57-58 Bluetooth (hands-free)......... 28-29, 15-16, 11-12 Child seats, ISOFIX........................ 109-111, 113
Adjusting the air distribution...................... 65-68 Bluetooth (telephone)...................... 28-30, 15-17 CITROËN Connect Nav.....................................1
Adjusting the air flow.................................. 65-68 Bonnet.................................................... 165-166 CITROËN Connect Radio..................................1
Adjusting the date....................33-35, 43, 36, 20 Boot...................................................... 52, 71, 74 Closing the boot.........................................45, 52
Adjusting the height and reach Brake discs.............................................. 171-172 Closing the doors..................................45-47, 51
of the steering wheel.....................................61 Brake lamps...................................................187 Coat hanger.....................................................73
Adjusting the temperature......................... 65-68 Brakes............................................... 13, 171-172 Configuration, vehicle................................ 33-38
Adjusting the time....................33-35, 43, 36, 20 Braking, automatic emergency.........16, 142-144 Connection, Bluetooth..... 21-22, 28-30, 15-17, 12
Advice on driving.................................... 118-119 Braking, dynamic emergency........................125 Connection, MirrorLink......................... 19, 12-14
Airbags................................................17, 97, 102 Brightness........................................................19 Connection, Wi-Fi network..............................22
Airbags, curtain.......................................... 98-99 Bulbs..............................................................184 Control, electric windows........................... 55-56
Airbags, front.............................. 97-99, 102-103 Bulbs (changing)....................................184, 187 Control, emergency boot release....................52
Airbags, lateral........................................... 98-99 Control, emergency door.................................49
AIRBUMP ®..................................................... 175 Control, heated seats.......................................59
C
Air conditioning................................................66 Control stalk, lighting..................... 24-25, 77, 80
Air conditioning, automatic..................64, 66-68 Control stalk, wipers..................................84, 86
Air conditioning, manual............................ 64-66 Courtesy lamp..........................................70, 188
Cable, audio...............................................26, 10
Air intake.................................................... 65-68 Cover, load space............................................75
Cable, jack.................................................26, 10
Air vents..................................................... 63-64 Cruise control..................................136, 139-141
Capacity, fuel tank..................................158-159
Alarm.......................................................... 54-55 Cruise control by speed limit recognition......136
Cap, fuel filler..........................................158-159
Anti-lock braking system (ABS).......................92 Cup holder........................................................ 71
CarPlay connection................................... 18, 13
Anti-theft........................................................120
CD..................................................... 26-27, 11, 9
Armrest, front............................................. 71, 73
D
CD, MP3.......................................26-27, 11, 9-10
ASR..................................................................92
Central locking..................................... 46-47, 52
Assistance call........................................... 88-91
Changing a bulb..............................184, 187-188
Assistance, emergency braking..............92, 144 DAB (Digital Audio
Changing a fuse......................................189-193
Audible warning...............................................88 Broadcasting) – Digital radio............. 25, 9, 6-7
Changing a wheel...................................179-181
Audio streaming (Bluetooth).................27, 11, 10 Date (setting)............................33-35, 43, 36, 20
Changing a wiper blade...........................85, 164
Auxiliary...........................................26-27, 10-11 Daytime running lamps...............77, 80, 184-185
.
Changing the remote control battery...............50
Checking the engine oil level...........................29 Daytime running lamps, LED.........................185
Checking the levels.................................168-170 Deactivating the passenger
Checking tyre pressures (using the kit)......176-178 airbag........................................ 97-98, 102-103
Checks............................................ 167, 170-172 Deadlocking...............................................45, 48
207
Alphabetical index
Defrosting.........................................................69 Filter, oil.......................................................... 171 Head restraints, front.......................................58

Defrosting, front...............................................69 Filter, particle.......................................... 170-171 Head restraints, rear.................................. 60-61
Demisting, front................................................69 Filter, passenger compartment...................... 171 Heating....................................................... 65-66
Dimensions....................................................204 Fitting a wheel.........................................181-183 Hill start assist................................................130
Dipstick............................................. 29, 168-169 Fitting roof bars...................................... 164-165 Hooks............................................................... 74
Direction indicators.............79-80, 184-185, 187 Fittings, boot...............................................74-75 Horn.................................................................88
Display screen, instrument panel..................129 Fittings, interior...........................................71-72
Distance alert ~ Collision Risk Alert..............143 Flap, fuel filler..........................................158-159
Doors................................................................ 51
Driver’s attention warning..............................146
Flashing indicators....................... 24, 79-80, 185
Foglamp, rear.............................................23, 78 I
Driving time warning...............................145-146 Foglamps, front..........................24, 78, 184, 186 Ignition.........................................68, 122-123, 31
DSC..................................................................92 Foglamps, rear.................................................78 Ignition on......................................................123
Dynamic stability control (DSC)............17, 92-93 Folding the rear seats................................ 60-61 Immobiliser, electronic.............................48, 120
Frequency (radio)....................................... 24-25 Indicator, AdBlue ® range..................................30
Fuel................................................................160 Indicator, coolant temperature.........................26
E Fuel tank........................................................159
Fusebox, engine compartment......................193
Indicator, engine oil level.................................29
Indicator lamps, operation...............................12
Earth point, remote........................................167 Fuses.......................................................189-193 Indicators, direction.................................79, 185
EBA..................................................................92 Inflating tyres.................................................205
EBFD................................................................92 Inflating tyres and accessories
Economy mode..............................................163
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)......92 G (using the kit)........................................176-178
Instrument panel...........................................8-11
Emergency call.......................................... 88-91 Gauge, fuel.............................................158-159 Internet browser...............................................18
Emergency switching off................................124 Gearbox, automatic........................126-133, 171 ISOFIX........................................................... 110
Emergency warning lamps........................75, 88 Gearbox, manual.............. 71, 125, 130-133, 171 Isofix mountings.............................................109
Energy economy mode..................................163 Gear lever, manual gearbox..........................125
Engine compartment.....................................167 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear
Engine, Diesel........................................160, 176
Engine, petrol.........................................160, 167
efficiency indicator......................................129
Glove box....................................................71-72
G.P.S................................................................14 Jack.......................................72, 179-181, 26, 10
J
Engines.................................................. 201-203
Environment.....................................................48 Jump starting.................................................196
H
ESC/ASR..........................................................92
K
F
Hazard warning lamps...............................75, 88
Hazard warning lamps, automatic operation.......88
Headlamps, automatic dipping............ 25, 82-83 Key.......................................................44, 46-49
Fatigue detection....................................145-146 Headlamps, automatic illumination......77, 79-81 Key, electronic............................................ 46-47
Filling the fuel tank................................. 158-160 Headlamps, dipped beam...........25, 77, 184-185 Keyless Entry and Starting.46-48, 120, 122-123
Filter, air......................................................... 171 Headlamps, halogen......................................184 Key not recognised........................................124
Filter, Diesel fuel............................................167 Headlamps, main beam..............25, 77, 184-186 Key with remote control.................................120
208
Alphabetical index
Kit, hands-free..................... 28-29, 15-16, 11-12 Mirror, rear view...............................................63 Profiles.......................................................34, 18

Kit, temporary puncture repair.......... 74, 176-178 Mirrors, door.................................... 62, 148-150 Protecting children............. 97-98, 100-103, 107,
Misfuel prevention..........................................159 109-111, 113
Mountings, Isofix............................................109 Protectors....................................................... 175
L MP3 CD............................................................10 Puncture..................................................176-178
N R
Labels, identification......................................205
Lamp, boot............................................... 71, 188
Lamps, parking................................................80
Number plate lamps.......................................188 Radio....................................23-24, 27, 7, 11, 4-6
Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS).................................... 147-148 Radio, digital (Digital Audio
O
LEDs – Light-emitting diodes..................80, 184 Broadcasting – DAB).............................25, 9, 6
Level, brake fluid............................................169 Range, AdBlue........................................... 30-31
Level, Diesel additive..................................... 170 RDS........................................................ 24-25, 7
Oil change.............................................. 168-169 Rear screen, demisting....................................69
Level, engine coolant........................26, 169-170 Oil consumption..................................... 168-169
Level, engine oil............................... 29, 168-169 Recharging the battery..................................197
Oil, engine.............................................. 168-169 Recirculation, air........................................ 65-68
Levels and checks.................................. 167-170 Opening the bonnet............................... 165-166
Level, screenwash fluid...........................85, 170 Reduction of electrical load...........................163
Opening the boot................................. 45-46, 52 Regeneration of the particle filter.................. 171
Light-emitting diodes – LEDs..........80, 184, 188 Opening the doors............................... 45-46, 51
Lighting, guide-me home.................................81 Reinitialisation of the under-
Lighting, interior...............................................70 inflation detection system.....................153-154
P
Lighting, welcome............................................81 Reinitialising the remote control......................50
Load reduction mode.....................................163 Reminder, key in ignition................................122
Locating your vehicle.......................................45 Reminder, lighting on................................. 78-79
Pads, brake............................................. 171-172 Remote control........................................... 44-48
Locking.......................................................45, 48 Paint...............................................................205
Locking from the inside....................................52 Removing a wheel..................................181-183
Paint colour code...........................................205 Removing the mat............................................73
Low fuel level..........................................158-159 Panoramic glass sunroof.................................70 Replacing bulbs.....................................184, 187
Parcel shelf, rear.........................................74-75 Replacing fuses......................................189-192
M
Parking brake............................ 13, 125, 171-172 Replacing the air filter.................................... 171
Parking brake, electric...................................125 Replacing the oil filter.................................... 171
Parking sensors, rear.............................150-151 Replacing the passenger
Maintenance (advice)..................................... 175 Plates, identification......................................205
Map reading lamps..........................................70 compartment filter....................................... 171
Player, Apple ®.......................................27, 11, 10 Reservoir, screenwash.................................. 170
Markings, identification..................................205 Player, MP3 CD...................................... 26, 9-10
Mat............................................................. 71, 73 Resetting the service indicator........................29
Player, USB............................................26, 10, 8 Resetting the trip recorder...............................32
Menu................................................................13
.
Port, USB....................................71-72, 26, 10, 8 Reversing camera..........................................152
Menu, main........................................................4 Pre-heater, Diesel............................................23
Menus (audio).........................................4-5, 4-6 Roof bars................................................ 164-165
Pressures, tyres.....................................179, 205 Running out of fuel (Diesel)........................... 176
Messages.........................................................32 Pre-tensioning seat belts.................................96
Messages, quick..............................................32 Priming the fuel system................................. 176
209
Alphabetical index
S U
Safety, children.................. 97-98, 100-103, 107, Stop (warning lamp).........................................13 Under floor storage.......................................... 74
109-111, 113 Storage.............................................................72 Under-inflation (detection).............................152
Screen menu map............................................ 13 Sun visor.......................................................... 71 Unlocking................................................... 45-46
Screen, monochrome................................ 33-35 Switching off the engine................................120 Unlocking from the inside................................52
Screen, multifunction (with audio system).........4 Synchronising the remote control....................50 Updating the date................................ 43, 36, 20
Screenwash, front............................................85 Updating the time................................ 43, 36, 20
Screenwash, rear.............................................84 USB..............................................26-27, 10-11, 8
T
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction)............. 172
SCR system................................................... 172
Seat belts...........................................94-96, 106
Seats, front.......................................................57 Tables of fuses........................................189-193
Tank, fuel.................................................158-159
V
Seats, heated...................................................59 Ventilation.................................................. 63-66
Seats, rear.................................................. 60-61 Telephone............................ 28-33, 15-18, 11-14 Voice commands..........................................5-10
Selector, gear..........................................126-128 Telephone, Bluetooth with voice recognition.....15
Serial number, vehicle...................................205 Temperature, coolant.......................................26
W
Service indicator........................................ 27, 29 Third brake lamp............................................187
Servicing..........................................................27 Three flashes (direction indicators).................79
Settings, equipment................................... 33-38 Time (setting)...........................33-35, 43, 36, 20
Warning and indicator lamps...........................12
Settings, system.........................................35, 19 TMC (Traffic info).............................................14
Warning lamp, braking system........................13
Sidelamps...........................77, 80, 184-185, 187 Tools........................................................179-181
Warning lamp, Diesel engine pre-heater........23
Side repeater.................................................186 Total distance recorder....................................32
Warning lamp, driver's seat
Snow chains...........................................153, 161 Touch screen..................................... 35-38, 1, 1
belt not fastened...................................... 94-95
Socket, 12 V accessory..............................71-72 Touch screen tablet................................... 35-38
Warning lamp, low fuel level............................18
Socket, auxiliary.....................................26, 10, 9 Towbar.................................................... 119, 162
Warning lamps.................................................12
Socket, JACK...................................72, 26, 10, 9 Towed loads...................................................201
Warning lamp, seat belts........................... 94-95
Sockets, audio.................................................72 Towing another vehicle.......................... 199-200
Warning lamp, Service....................................22
Speed limiter...........................................136-139 Towing eye....................................................... 74
Warning lamp, Stop.........................................13
Speed limit recognition...........................133-135 Traction control (ASR)..........................17, 92-93
Weights.................................................. 201-203
Stability control (ESC).....................................92 Traffic information (TA)......................................5
Wheel, spare...................................179-181, 205
Starting a Diesel engine................................160 Traffic information (TMC).................................14
Window controls........................................ 55-56
Starting the engine........................................120 Trailer..................................................... 119, 162
Wiper blades (changing)..........................85, 164
Starting the vehicle..........118, 120-123, 126-128 Triangle, warning........................................74-75
Wiper, rear.......................................................84
Starting using another battery...............124, 196 Trip computer............................................. 40-41
Wipers........................................................84, 86
Station, radio.......................................23-25, 7, 4 Trip distance recorder......................................32
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive................84, 86
Stay, bonnet........................................... 165-166 Tyres...............................................................205
Steering mounted controls, audio.............3, 3, 3 Tyre under-inflation detection.......... 16, 152, 179
Steering wheel, adjustment.............................61
Stop.................................................................. 13
Stopping the vehicle........118, 120-123, 126-128
Stop & Start.................... 24, 41, 65, 69, 131-133,
159, 165, 170, 198
210
4Dconcept
Xerox
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application Interak
of the provisions of the European legislation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life
Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by
this legislation and that recycled materials are
used in the manufacture of the products that it
sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of

this document is prohibited without written
authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
03-17

*17B61.0040* ANG. 17B61.0040

Manual Citroen C3-2004

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Citroen C3-2004

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Citroen C3-2004

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HANDBOOK

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Direct access to the Basic Guide.

This symbol indicates the latest

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Right-hand drive vehicle

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

Overview . Access Lighting and visibility

Drive smoothly Switch off the demisting and defrosting

Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place

When filling the tank, do not continue after the

Observe the recommendations

LCD Picto instrument panel

Dials Control buttons

Display screen 9. Trip computer.

LCD text instrument panel Dials

1. Speedometer (mph or km/h).

Display screen If your vehicle does not have an audio system

Warning and indicator Warning lights Operation indicator lights

Warning / indicator lamp

Illumination of this warning lamp is

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

* Only on the LCD Picto instrument panel.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Fixed, associated with Speed above 6 mph (10 km/h), a

Front left belt The front left passenger belt has

Front right belt The front right passenger belt has

* Only on the LCD Picto instrument panel.

Warning / indicator lamp

You must stop as soon it is safe to

You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

The DSC/ASR regulation is

The system optimises traction and improves the

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

The diesel filter contains water.

Risk of damaging the fuel injection system on diesel

* Only on the LCD Picto instrument panel.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

Fixed, on switching on the

A fault with the SCR emissions

This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Warning / indicator lamp

When the ignition is switched on

The period of illumination of the indicator lamp is

* Only on the LCD text instrument panel.

Warning / indicator lamp State Cause Action / Observations

Sidelamps Fixed. The lighting stalk is in the

Warning / indicator lamp

The function has been activated via

The camera, placed on the top of the windscreen,

Dipped beam Fixed. The lighting lever is in the "Dipped

* Only with the LCD Picto instrument panel.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

After first switching off the ignition, open

eyless Entry and

Version with Keyless Entry and